Samsung Electronics Co SGHI527 Portable Handset with Multi-band WCDMA/GSM/EDGE/LTE, WLAN, Bluetooth and RFID User Manual i527 Mega

Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Portable Handset with Multi-band WCDMA/GSM/EDGE/LTE, WLAN, Bluetooth and RFID i527 Mega

UserManual.wiki >

Samsung Electronics Co >

SGHI527 User Manual HTML Version

Users Manual

4G LTE SMARTPHONE

User Manual

Please read this manual before operating your

phone, and keep it for future reference.

Mega Logo Treatment Goes Here

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

SGH-I527_UM_English_UCUAME5_WC_052313_D1

Intellectual Property

All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers

relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Phone

System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual

Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software,

computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the

rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare

derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No

title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain

with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.

Open Source Software

Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser

General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered

under the open source licenses, please visit:

http://opensource.samsung.com

Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability

EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE

PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND

WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR

ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE

PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR

COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF

THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS

OR BENEFITS.

Modification of Software

SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,

OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.

USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. YOUR

CARRIER MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE, SUCH AS CUSTOM OS.

IF YOUR CARRIER PROHIBITS THIS, IF YOU ATTEMPT TO DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE ONTO THE DEVICE WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION,

YOU WILL BE NOTIFIED ON THE SCREEN THAT UNAUTHORIZED SOFTWARE HAS BEEN DETECTED. YOU SHOULD THEN POWER

DOWN THE DEVICE AND CONTACT YOUR CARRIER TO RESTORE THE DEVICE TO THE CARRIER AUTHORIZED SETTINGS.

SAFE™ (Samsung Approved For Enterprise)

SAFE™: "SAFE™" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own

internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes field

testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the

Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as

described by the third party security solution providers. The testing, for example, includes field testing with local network

connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. For more

information about Samsung's SAFE™ program, please refer to

www.samsung.com/us/safe

Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE

FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE "SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL

WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™

DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO

INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. In

addition, information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with, among other

things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider,

solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private network solution is at the sole

discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security

protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement of limited

warranty, please refer to

www.samsung.com/us/safe

, available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab™

devices are sold. [101212]

Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC

Headquarters:

1301 E. Lookout Drive

Richardson, TX 75082

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone? For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS

System (Automated Response System) at:

http://www.samsung.com/us/support.

Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,

Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.

The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are

registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.

microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.

Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.

LTE is a trademark of ETSI.

and are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HD technologies are incorporated under license

from SRS Labs, Inc.

Customer Care Center:

1000 Klein Rd.

Plano, TX 75074

Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)

Internet Address:

http://www.samsung.com

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

, DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under

license.

DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX

Certified® device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it plays DivX video. Visit

www.divx.com

for more information and

software tools to convert your files into DivX videos.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-

Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (tap

Apps >

Settings >

More > About device > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register

). Go to

vod.divx.com

for more

information on how to complete your registration.

Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google Talk,

Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.

Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.

Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make

any modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. A voice plan is

required on all voice-capable devices, unless specifically noted otherwise in the terms governing your agreement. Some devices

or plans may require you to subscribe to a data plan.

Your phone is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be

aware that some applications that you enable may involve the location of your phone being shared. For applications available

through AT&T, AT&T offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your phone and other

phones on your account. However, AT&T's privacy tools do not apply to applications available outside of AT&T. Please review the

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

terms and conditions and the associated privacy policy for each location-based service to learn how location information will be

used and protected.

Your phone may be used to access the Internet and to download, and/or purchase goods, applications, and services from AT&T or

elsewhere from third parties. AT&T provides tools for you to control access to the Internet and certain Internet content. These

controls may not be available for certain devices which bypass AT&T controls.

AT&T may collect certain types of information from your device when you use AT&T services to provide customer support and to

improve its services. For more information on AT&T's Privacy Policy, visit

http://www.att.com/privacy

Your phone features earSmart™, an intelligent voice processor that delivers a clear voice experience, allowing you to

hear and be

heard

™ in nearly any environment. earSmart technology uses the science of human hearing to distinguish sounds, identify your

voice and suppress surrounding noise, for clear conversations just about anywhere.

How Does It Work?

•

The earSmart voice processor in your phone captures your voice and all the sounds around you.

•

Working like the human ear, it processes and distinguishes these sounds, isolates your voice conversation, and removes background noise -

from both ends of a call.

•

It also automatically equalizes and adjusts voice volume so you can hear and talk naturally, even in the noisiest places.

•

With earSmart technology, you can talk where you want, and have clear conversations for mobile calls, video chats, even speakerphone calls,

without worrying about surrounding noise.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Table of Contents

Section 1: Getting Started ............................. 6

Setting Up Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Charging a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Switching the Phone On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen . . . . . . 12

Configuring your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Creating a Samsung Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Creating a New Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Retrieving your Google Account Password . . . . . 15

Setting Up Your Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Section 2: Understanding Your Phone ........ 16

Features of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Front View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Side Views of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Rear View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Display Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Using Motions and Gestures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Using the Multi Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Customizing Your Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Notification Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Section 3: Call Functions .............................50

Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Making Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Making a Call Using Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Making a Call from the Address Book . . . . . . . . . 52

Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Call Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Options During a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Section 4: Entering Text ..............................62

Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Entering Text Using the Samsung Keyboard . . . . . 62

Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad . . . . . . . 63

Using ABC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Using Symbol/Numeric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Predictive Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Entering Text Using Handwriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Samsung Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Using the Google Voice Typing Feature . . . . . . . . 65

Entering Text Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Section 5: Contacts and Your Address

Book ..........................................................68

AT&T Address Book Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Adding a New Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Editing an Existing Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Using Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Joining Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Synchronizing Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Address Book Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Address Book Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Managing Address Book Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Section 6: Multimedia ..................................81

Samsung Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Samsung Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

AT&T Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Google Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Mobile TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Camera Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Quick Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Camera and Camcorder Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Editing a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

Using the Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Section 7: Messaging ................................ 103

Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Viewing New Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . .106

Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

Using Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Using Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Google Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Messages App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

ChatON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Section 8: Changing Your Settings ........... 118

Accessing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Settings Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Wi-Fi Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Data Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

More networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

S Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Nearby devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Screen Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Kies via Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Lock Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

LED indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Home screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Blocking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Power saving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Accessory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Language and input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Motions and Gestures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Smart screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Air view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Add Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Back up and reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Location services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Section 9: Connections ..............................163

Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

NFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Section 10: Applications ............................178

AT&T DriveMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

AT&T FamilyMap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

AT&T Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

AT&T Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

AT&T Smart Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

ChatON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Flipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Google . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Group Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

Mobile Hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

Mobile TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

myAT&T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

Optical Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

Play Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

Play Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

Play Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

POLARIS Office 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

S Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

S Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

S Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

S Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Samsung Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Samsung Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Samsung Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Story Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

TripAdvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

WatchON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

YPmobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Section 11: Health and Safety

Information ............................................. 208

Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . . 208

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

FCC Part 15 Information to User . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) . . . 215

Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . . . 219

UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)

Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . 227

Restricting Children's Access to Your

Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . 230

Section 12: Warranty Information .............232

Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

End User License Agreement for Software . . . . . 237

Section 13: Samsung Product

Registration .............................................245

Index ............................................................246

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Getting Started 6

Section 1: Getting Started

This section explains how to start using your phone by first

configuring your hardware, activating your service, and then

setting up your voice mail.

Setting Up Your Phone

Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM

into their corresponding internal compartments. The

microSD™ card slot is also located in this same internal

area.

1. Remove the back cover by inserting a fingernail into

the slot on the top of your phone (1).

2. Lift the cover up (2) and to the right of the phone.

Caution!

Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively.

Doing so may damage the cover.

Installing the SIM Card

When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided

with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details,

such as your PIN, available optional services, and many

others features.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Important!

The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts

can be easily damaged by scratching or bending,

so be careful when handling, inserting, or

removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach

of small children.



Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket

(as shown) until the card locks into place.

•

Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone

and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned

as shown.

Note:

If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not

detect the SIM card. Re-orient the card back into the slot

if the SIM is not detected.

Installing the Battery

1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the

phone, making sure the connectors align (1).

2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).

Incorrect

Correct

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Getting Started 8

Removing and Installing the Memory Card

You can use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC card to

expand available memory space if you desire. This secure

digital card enables you to exchange images, music, and

data between SD-compatible devices. This type of memory

card is designed for use with this mobile phone and other

devices.

Note:

Your phone has been tested to support up to a 64GB

memory card.

Installing the Memory Card



Push the microSD card into the slot until it clicks (as

shown).

•

Make sure the microSD’s gold contact pins face downward and

the card is securely inserted.

For more information on Memory Cards, see “Memory Card”

on page 48.

Removing the Memory Card

1. Push on the memory card until it clicks and is released.

2. Grasp the memory card and remove it from the phone.

Correct

Incorrect

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Installing the Back Cover

1. Place the battery cover onto the back of the phone (1)

and press down (2).

2. Press along the edge of the back cover (3) until you

have a secure seal.

Note:

Make sure the battery is properly installed before

switching on the phone.

Charging a Battery

Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The

Travel Charger that is used to charge the battery, is included

with your device. Use only Samsung-approved batteries and

chargers.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Getting Started 10

Note:

You must fully charge the battery before using your

phone for the first time. A discharged battery recharges

fully in approximately 4 hours.

Note:

Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate

mode, web browser use, and other variables may

reduce the battery’s talk and standby times.

Although you can use the phone while the battery is

charging, doing so will require additional charging time.

Using the Travel Charger

Important!

Verify that the handset battery is installed prior to

connection. If the battery is not properly installed

and the wall charger is connected, the handset

may power off and on continuously, preventing

proper operation.

1. Plug the flat end of the Travel Charger into the Power/

Accessory Interface connector and the other end into a

standard AC wall outlet.

2. When charging is finished, remove the flat end from

the interface connector jack on the phone.

Correct

Incorrect

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Warning!

If your handset has a touch screen display, please

note that a touch screen responds best to a light

touch from the pad of your finger. Using excessive

force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch

screen may damage the tempered glass surface and

void the warranty. For more information, refer to

“Standard Limited Warranty” on page 232.

Note:

Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the

battery, can cause damage to the phone.

Low Battery Indicator

When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time

remain, the battery icon ( ) blinks and the device sounds a

warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your

phone conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning

off the backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a

quick check of your battery level, glance at the battery

charge indicator located in the upper-right corner of your

device’s display. Solid color ( ) indicates a full charge.

When the battery level becomes too low, the phone

automatically turns off.

You can also choose to display a percentage value. Having a

percentage value on-screen can provide a better idea of the

remaining charge on the battery.



From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Display

➔

Display battery percentage

Switching the Phone On or Off

1. Press and hold until the phone switches

on.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Getting Started 12

2. Swipe your finger across the screen to unlock the

phone.

Note:

The display language is preset to English at the factory.

To change the language, use the Language menu. For

more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on

page 118.

3. To switch off the phone, press and hold ,

until the

Device options

screen displays.

4. Tap

Power off

to switch off the phone.

5. At the

Power off

prompt, tap

Locking and Unlocking the Touch

Screen

1. Press to lock the touch screen.

2. Press again to display the lock screen

then swipe your finger across the screen to unlock.

Note:

Swipe is the default screen locking method. To change

your screen lock, see “Lock Screen Settings” on

page 127.

Configuring your Phone

When you first turn on your phone, you will need to set up a

few things.

1. The

Welcome to AT&T Ready2Go!

screen displays. The

default language for your phone is English. If you would

like to select another language, tap

English

and scroll

up or down to select one of the listed languages.

2. Tap the

Accessibility

box at the bottom of the screen to

modify any of the Accessibility function if you desire.

For more information, refer to “Accessory Settings” on

page 139.

3. Tap

4. At the

Got Google?

display, tap

Yes

if you already have a

Google account and sign in to your account, or tap

you do not have a Google account.

5. If you answered

in step 4, tap

Get an account

and

follow the on-screen instructions to create a new

Google account or sign in to an existing account.

If you want to wait until later to create a Google

account, tap

Not now

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Note:

In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you

will need to create a Google™ Account when you first

use your device. With a Google Account, you will have

access to more Google applications and applications will

always be in sync between your phone and computer.

6. At the

Google & location

screen, a blue checkmark

displays next to the text that explains that you allow

Google’s location service to collect anonymous location

data from your phone. If you disagree, tap the

checkmark to remove it.

7. A blue checkmark also displays next to the text that

explains that you allows your location to be used for

Google search results and other Google services. If you

disagree, tap the checkmark to remove it. Tap the

icon .

8. At the

This phone belongs to...

display, enter your

First

and

Last

names in the provided fields so that your

phone can personalize some applications. Tap .

9. At the

Set up email

display, tap an Email account to set

up your email. For more information, refer to “Using

Email” on page 111.

10. Tap

11. At the

Samsung account

display, tap

Create new

account

if you don’t have one yet or tap

if you

have already set up your Samsung account. For more

information, refer to “Creating a Samsung Account”

on page 14.

– or –

Tap

Skip

if you want to wait until later.

12. At the

Thank you

screen, enter a device name (optional)

and tap

13. At the

Learn about key features

display, tap each

function to learn more about them.

14. Tap

Finish

to complete your setup.

15. At the

AT&T Locker Setup

display, tap

Locker

or tap

Skip

if you want to sign up later. For more

information, refer to “AT&T Locker” on page 179.

The main Home screen displays.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Getting Started 14

Creating a Samsung Account

An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing

applications such as ChatON and Samsung Hub. If you did

not create a Samsung account when you first set up your

phone, follow these steps:

1. From the home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Accounts

➔

Add account

2. Tap

Samsung account

3. Tap

Create new account

4. Enter the required information and tap

5. Tap

Terms and conditions

to read them and tap .

6. Tap all of the other headings to read them and tap .

7. Tap the

I accept all the terms

above

checkbox.

8. Tap

Agree

9. At the Welcome screen, tap

10. Follow the on-screen instructions to verify your email

address and activate your account.

Creating a New Google Account

In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you will

need to create a Google™ Account when you first use your

device. With a Google Account, Google applications will

always be in sync between your phone and computer.

If you did not create a new account during the setup

procedure when you first turned your phone on, follow these

steps:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Gmail

The

Add a Google Account

screen displays.

2. Tap

New

to create a new Google account.

– or –

If you already have a Google account, tap

Existing

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a Google

Account.

Note:

Once you have created a Google account, you only need

to sign in.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Retrieving your Google Account

Password

A Google account password is required for Google

applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account

password, follow these instructions to retrieve it:

1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and

navigate to

http://google.com/accounts.

2. Click on the

Can’t access your account?

link.

3. Tap the

I don’t know my password

radio button.

4. Enter your Email address and click

Continue

5. Follow the password recovery procedure.

Setting Up Your Voice Mail

1. From the Home screen, tap , then tap .

2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, record a

greeting, and record your name.

Note:

These steps may be different depending on your

network.

Accessing Your Voice Mail

1. From the Home screen, tap , then tap .

You may be prompted to enter a password.

2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the

voice mail center.

Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone

1. Dial your wireless phone number.

2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the

asterisk key on the phone you are using.

3. Enter your password.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 16

Section 2: Understanding Your Phone

This section outlines some key features of your phone and

describes the screen and the icons that appear when the phone

is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the phone and

provides information on using a memory card.

Features of Your Phone

Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many

useful features. The following list outlines a few of the

features included in your phone.

•

LTE network (5-6 bands) with ??? gigahertz quad-core processor

•

Android v 4.2.2, Jelly Bean Platform

•

Brilliant ???” Full HD Super AMOLED display

•

Touch screen provides quick response to a variety of in-phone

menus and options including applications, multi-windows and up

to seven home screens.

•

Smart Switch™ compliant. For more information, see

www.samsungsmartswitch.com

•

Ready access to the Internet

•

Built-in Bluetooth and advanced Wi-Fi

technology

•

Mobile Hotspot and USB Tethering capability

•

8 Megapixel camera and camcorder with Front Facing camera

•

Smart Remote using WatchON

•

AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation

•

Delivers data faster using 4G LTE and High Speed Packet Access

Plus (HSPA+).

•

Up to 64GB expandable memory slot

•

16 GB memory and 2 GB RAM

•

Corporate and Personal Email

•

Sync and update social network applications

•

Over 650,000 Apps available to download via Google Play

Store™ and Samsung Hub

•

Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube,

Google Maps, Google Voice Search)

•

Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging, and

Instant Messaging with Google Talk™

•

DivX Certified

to play DivX

video up to HD 1080p, including

premium content

•

Samsung Link to share your media content across DLNA certified

devices

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Front View of Your Phone

Status light

: displays red when charging, green when

fully charged, blue when powering up, and orange

when a notification has arrived.

Light (RGB) Sensor

: lets you use the ambient light level

to adjust the screen brightness/contrast. This sensor

decreases screen brightness in dim light.

External speaker

: allows you to hear the caller.

4. Application icons: you can place shortcuts to your

favorite applications on the Home screen.

5. Primary shortcuts: allows quick access to important

features such as Phone, Contacts, Messaging, Internet,

and Apps. For more information, refer to “Primary

Shortcuts” on page 20.

6. Menu key: allows you to access sub-menus with

additional options for different features and

applications such as Home screen, Phone, Contacts,

Messaging, and Web.

7. Home key: allows you to return to the main Home

screen from any Home screen or menu. Press and hold

to display Recent apps, Task Manager, and Google

Search. Quickly press twice to activate the S Voice

application.

8. Back key: allows you step backwards when navigating

a menu or web page.

114

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 18

Home screen indicator

: shows which Home screen is

presently displayed.

10. Google Quick Search bar: a shortcut to Google Search

that allows you to search for items on the internet.

11. Weather widget: displays Time, Day, Date,

Temperature and weather conditions for your area.

12. Indicator icons: shows the information needed to

operate your phone, such as the received signal

strength, phone battery level, time, unread Emails,

missed calls, etc.

13.

Front facing camera

: allows you to take pictures of

yourself when you set the camera shooting mode to

Self shot.

14.

Proximity and Light sensors

: uses the ambient light

level to adjust keypad access. If the light path is

blocked, for example, when holding the phone close to

your ear, the touch screen will turn off.

Side Views of Your Phone

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

3.5mm Headset jack

: allows you to plug in headphones.

Volume keys

: allow you to adjust the ringer volume

while in standby mode or adjust the voice volume

during a call. When receiving an incoming call, briefly

press down either volume key ( ) to mute

the ring tone. Adjusts text size when reading a

message.

Microphone

: allows other callers to hear you when you

are speaking to them. It is also used for the

Speakerphone.

4. Power/Accessory Interface connector: allows you to

connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories

such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for

convenient, hands-free conversations.

5. Power/Lock key: ( ) lets you power your

phone on and off. Also allows you to lock or unlock the

touch screen. For more information on locking your

phone, see “Locking and Unlocking the Phone” on

page 34.

Microphone

: used for noise cancellation and stereo

recording.

Rear View of Your Phone

Camera lens

: is used to take pictures and shoot videos.

External speaker

: allows you to hear when the

Speakerphone is turned on.

Flash

: is used to provide adequate light when taking

pictures in dark places.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 20

Display Layout

Your display screen provides a wealth of information about

the phone’s status and options, as well as providing access

to application icons. For more information, refer to “Front

View of Your Phone” on page 17.

Primary Shortcuts

There are four non-movable Application Shortcuts that

appear at the bottom of all Home screens. The default

shortcuts are:

•

Phone

for dialing a number.

•

Contacts

for managing your contacts in your Address Book.

•

Messaging

for creating and viewing Messages.

•

Internet

for surfing the Internet.

•

Apps

for accessing the applications on your phone.

You can change the Phone, Messaging, S Note, and Internet

application shortcuts to any icon that is displayed in the Apps

menu.

For more information, refer to “Adding and Removing

Primary Shortcuts” on page 42.

Indicator Icons

This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s

display and Indicator area:

Displays your current signal strength. The greater

the number of bars, the stronger the signal.

Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You

cannot send or receive any calls or access online

information.

Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.

Displays when there is no network available.

Displays when your phone is in Blocking mode.

Displays when there is a system error or alert.

Displays to indicate a security warning. You are

prompted to set a screen lock password.

Displays when a call is in progress.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Displays when a call is on hold.

Displays when the speakerphone is on.

Displays when a call has been missed.

Displays when a call has been muted.

Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always

forward. For more information, refer to “Call

forwarding” on page 61.

Displays your battery charge level. Icon shown is

fully charged.

Displays when your battery is charging. Also

displays battery charge level.

Device Power Low – Shows your current battery

only has between 15 and 28 percent power

remaining.

Device Power Very Low – Shows your current

battery only has between 5 and 15 percent power

remaining.

Device Power Critical – Shows your current battery

only has less than 5 percent power remaining and

will immediately shutdown.

Displays when your connection to an EDGE network

is active.

Displays when your phone is communicating with

the EDGE network.

Displays when your connection to a UTMS, HSDPA,

HSPA, or HSPA+ network is active.

Displays when your phone is communicating with

the UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network.

Displays when your connection to a 4G LTE network

is active.

Displays when your phone is communicating with

the 4G LTE network.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 22

Displays when your phone is downloading or has

downloaded a file. It will blink green when it is

installing.

Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in

progress.

Displays when a Play Store download has

completed.

Displays when updates are available for download.

Displays when the phone is connected to a

computer via a supported USB cable connection.

Displays when the phone is tethered via a

supported USB cable connection.

Displays when a new text or multimedia message

is received.

Displays when a new voice mail is received.

Displays when Email is received.

Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event

has arrived. For more information, refer to

“Calendar” on page 180.

Displays when you set an alarm to ring at a specified

time. For more information, refer to “Alarm” o n p a g e

182.

Displays when the Sound profile is set to Mute.

Displays when the Sound profile is set to Vibrate.

Displays when Bluetooth is activated.

Displays when a Bluetooth device has been paired

with the phone.

Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and

communicating with a Wireless Access Point

(WAP).

Displays when there is a Wi-Fi access point

available but you are not connected to it. May also

display if there is a communication issue with the

target Wireless Access Point (WAP).

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see

“Changing Your Settings” on page 118.

Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and your phone

is connected to another device.

Displays when your phone as been configured as a

portable Wi-Fi hotspot.

Displays when GPS is active and acquiring a signal.

Displays when data synchronization and

application sync is active and synchronization is in

progress for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.

Displays when your phone is connecting to the

Device Management server when you first turn on

your phone.

Displays when Near Field Communication (NFC)

has been activated.

Displays when your device is connected being used

to control streaming media and is connected to a

Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified

device using the Samsung Link application.

Displays when a file is being uploaded or sync’d

between your device and an external Web storage

location.

Displays when the uploaded or transferred file was

successfully delivered.

Displays when TTY device has been inserted.

Displays when a screen capture has been taken.

Displays when the keypad is active.

Displays when an emergency call is taking place.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 24

Application Icons

The Apps menu provides quick access to the items you use

most frequently.

The following table contains a description of each

application. If the application is already described in another

section of this user manual, then a cross reference to that

particular section is provided.

For information on navigating through the Apps icons, see

“Navigating Through the Application Menus” on page 35.

1. From the Home screen, tap , then tap one of the

application icons.

2. Follow the on-screen instructions.

3. To return to the main Home screen, tap .

The following applications are available:

AT&T DriveMode

: With the AT&T DriveMode

application, you can set your phone to auto reply when

you are driving and don’t want to answer the phone.

You can set auto reply to Messages, Emails, and Phone

Calls. You can also allow up to five of your contacts to

contact you while you are in Drive mode. For more

information, refer to “AT&T DriveMode” on page 178.

AT&T FamilyMap

: provides peace of mind by being able

to conveniently locate a family member from your

wireless phone or PC and know that your family's

location information is secure and private. For more

information, refer to “AT&T FamilyMap” on page 178.

AT&T Locker

: AT&T Locker allows you to store, share,

and sync all of your photos, videos, and documents in

one safe, convenient place; the AT&T cloud. For more

information, refer to “AT&T Locker” on page 86.

AT&T Navigator

: AT&T Navigator provides you with

access to real-time GPS-driven applications. These

programs not only allow you to achieve turn-by-turn

navigation, but also access local searches based on a

variety of category parameters. For more information,

refer to “AT&T Navigator” on page 179.

AT&T Smart Wi-Fi

: With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can

maximize your battery performance, maximize your

data, simplify access to AT&T Hot Spots and Wi-Fi

networks, automate your Wi-Fi connections, and track

your data use. For more information, refer to “AT&T

Smart Wi-Fi” on page 173.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Calculator

: Using this feature you can use the phone as

a calculator. The calculator provides the basic

arithmetic functions; addition, subtraction,

multiplication, and division. You can also use this as a

scientific calculator. For more information, refer to

“Calculator” on page 180.

Calendar

: With the Calendar application, you can

consult the calendar by day, week, month, year, create

events, and set an alarm to act as a reminder, if

necessary. For more information, refer to “Calendar”

on page 180.

Camera

: Use your 13.0 megapixel camera feature to

produce photos and videos. For more information, refer

to “Camera” on page 95.

ChatON

: With the ChatON application, you can interact

with friends and family with text, images, hand-written

notes and video shared instantly. You can also chat in

groups. For more information, refer to “ChatON” on

page 182.

Chrome

: The Google Chrome app allows you to use the

Google Chrome web browser on your phone. For more

information, refer to “Chrome” on page 182.

Clock

: The Clock application allows you to access

alarms, view the World Clock, set a stopwatch, use a

timer, and setup a Desk Clock. For more information,

refer to “Clock” on page 182.

Contacts

: You can manage your daily contacts by

storing their name and number in your Address Book.

You can also synchronize your phone Address Book

with AT&T Address Book, the network backup service.

For more information, refer to “Contacts and Your

Address Book” on page 68.

Downloads

: The Downloads application allows you to

manage all of your downloads from the Play Store and

the Browser. For more information, refer to

“Downloads” on page 185.

: Email enables you to review and create email

using various email services. You can also receive text

message alerts when you receive an important email.

For more information, refer to “Using Email” on page

111.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 26

Flipboard

: This application creates a personalized

digital magazine out of everything being shared with

you. Access news stories, personal feeds and other

related material. For more information, refer to

“Flipboard” on page 186.

Gallery

: The Gallery is where you view photos and play

back videos. For photos, you can also perform basic

editing tasks, view a slideshow, set photos as

wallpaper or contact image, and share as a picture

message. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on

page 92.

Gmail

: Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is

configured when you first set up your phone.

Depending on your synchronization settings, Gmail

can automatically synchronize with your Gmail

account on the web. For more information, refer to

“Using Gmail” on page 113.

Google

: The Google Search application is the same on-

screen Internet search engine that is on the Google

Search Bar on your main Home screen. For more

information, see “Google Search Bar” on page 31.

Google+

: makes messaging and sharing with your

friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends,

visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles, use

Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your

Circles, or use Instant Upload to automatically upload

videos and photos to your own private album on

Google+. For more information, refer to “Google +” on

page 115.

Group Play

: Group Play allows you to share pictures,

music, and documents in real-time with your friends.

For more information, refer to “Group Play” on page

187.

Help

: The Help application allows you to get more

information on your phone features, applications,

settings, accessories, and access to online help. For

more information, refer to “Help” on page 188.

Internet

: Open the web browser to start surfing the

web. The browser is fully optimized and comes with

advanced functionality to enhance the Internet

browsing feature on your phone. For more information,

refer to “Internet” on page 163.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Local

: Local is an application that uses Google Maps

and your location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes,

Bars, Attractions, and more. You can also add your own

locations. For more information, refer to “Local” on

page 188.

Maps

: Depending on your location, you can view basic,

custom, and satellite maps and local business

information, including locations, contact information,

and driving directions. You can also post public

messages about a location and track your friends. For

more information, refer to “Maps” on page 189.

Messages

: AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and

voicemail messages together into a single

conversation thread and is accessible by phone or

computer. For more information, refer to “Messages

App” on page 116.

Messaging

: You can send and receive different types of

messages. For more information, refer to “Messaging”

on page 103.

Messenger

: Messenger allows you to bring groups of

friends together into a simple group conversation.

When you get a new conversation in Messenger,

Google+ sends an update to your phone. For more

information, refer to “Messenger” on page 115.

Mobile Hotspot

: This application allows you to share

your phones’s mobile data connection as a portable

Wi-Fi hotspot. For more information, refer to “Tethering

& portable hotspot” on page 123.

Mobile TV

: Mobile TV is a subscription service that

allows you to watch your favorite TV shows using your

handset. For more information, refer to “Mobile TV” o n

page 90.

Music

: The Music app allows you to play music files that

you have stored on your phone and memory card. You

can also create playlists. For more information, refer to

“Music” on page 87.

My Files

: My Files allows you to manage your sounds,

images, videos, bluetooth files, Android files, and other

memory card data in one convenient location. For more

information, refer to “My Files” on page 190.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 28

myAT&T

: myAT&T allows you to manage your own AT&T

account. You can review and pay your bill, check

minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or

change your rate plan. For more information, refer to

“myAT&T” on page 191.

Navigation

: Navigation is an internet-connected GPS

navigation system with voice guidance. You can type or

speak your destination. For more information, refer to

“Navigation” on page 192.

Optical Reader

: The Optical reader allows you to use

your camera to identify text and extract useful

information. For more information, refer to “Optical

Reader” on page 193.

Phone

: Allows you to access the dialer keypad, call

logs, and favorites. For more information, refer to “Call

Functions” on page 50.

Play Books

: With Google Play Books, you can find

more than 3 million free e-books and hundreds of

thousands more to buy in the eBookstore. For more

information, refer to “Play Books” on page 193.

Play Magazines

: With Google Play Magazines, you can

subscribe to your favorite magazines and have them

available to read on your phone at any time or any

place. For more information, refer to “Play Magazines”

on page 193.

Play Movies & TV

: With Google Play Movies & TV, you can

rent thousands of different movies and television

shows. You can watch instantly, or download your

movie or show for offline viewing at a later time. For

more information, refer to “Play Movies & TV” on page

92.

Play Music

With the Music application, while online, you can

play music that you have added to your music file as well as

any music you copied from your PC. While offline, you can

listen to music you have copied from your PC.

For more

information, refer to “Google Play Music” on page 90.

Play Store

: The Play Store provides access to

downloadable applications and games to install on

your phone. For more information, refer to “Play Store”

on page 194.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

POLARIS Office 5

: POLARIS® Office 5 is a Microsoft

Office compatible office suite. This application

provides a central place for managing your documents

online or offline. For more information, refer to

“POLARIS Office 5” on page 195.

S Health

: S Health is a wellness application that allows

you to better manage your health by providing you with

relevant information. For more information, refer to “S

Health” on page 195.

S Memo

: Use this application to create memos using

existing templates or your own design. You can use

handwriting or the keyboard to enter text. For more

information, refer to “S Memo” on page 195.

S Translator

: With the S Translator you can easily

translate words and phrases into many different

languages. For more information, refer to “S

Translator” on page 197.

S Voice

: With the S Voice application you can use your

voice to perform operations that you would normally

have to do by hand such as dialing a phone number,

texting a message, playing music, etc. For more

information, refer to “S Voice” on page 198.

Samsung Apps

: With Samsung Apps, you can

download hundred of applications from a variety of

categories. For more information, refer to “Samsung

Apps” on page 198.

Samsung Hub

: Samsung Hub is Samsung’s integrated

store for media content that offers a comprehensive

and consistent media service experience. You can

browse and purchase all media content within a single

store front. For more information, refer to “Samsung

Hub” on page 81.

Samsung Link

: With the Samsung Link app, you can

share and play content across smart devices anytime

and anywhere. For more information, refer to

“Samsung Link” on page 84.

Settings

: This icon navigates to the sound and phone

settings for your phone. It includes such settings as:

display, security, memory, and any extra settings

associated with your phone. For more information,

refer to “Changing Your Settings” on page 118.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 30

Story Album

: With Story Album, you can create a digital

Album of your story in media. Special moments will be

on a timeline, and if you wish, you can have your album

published as a hard copy. For more information, refer

to “Story Album” on page 199.

Talk

: Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based

application for instant messaging offered by Google.

Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats

area in your Gmail account. This allows you to search

a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts. For

more information, refer to “Google Talk” on page 115.

TripAdvisor

: With the TripAdvisor, you can plan and

have your perfect trip. With over 75 million reviews and

opinions by travelers, it is easy to find the best hotels,

restaurants, and fun things to do. For more information,

refer to “TripAdvisor” on page 199.

Video

: The Video application plays video files stored on

your phone or microSD card. For more information,

refer to “Video” on page 91.

Voice Recorder

: The Voice Recorder allows you to

record an audio file up to one minute long and then

immediately send it as a message. For more

information, refer to “Voice Recorder” on page 200.

Voice Search

: The Google Voice Search application

allows you to search the web using only your voice. For

more information, refer to “Voice Search” on page

201.

WatchON

: With the WatchON application, you can use

your phone as a remote control for your TV. For more

information, refer to “WatchON” on page 201.

YouTube

: YouTube is a video sharing website on which

users can upload and share videos, and view them in

MPEG-4 format. For more information, refer to

“YouTube” on page 205.

YPmobile

: The YPmobile (Yellowpages) application

provides quick and ready access to businesses, map

locations, and storage of your favorite searches. For

more information, refer to “YPmobile” on page 207.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Tip:

To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-

used applications to the Home screen or to the folders you

created. For details, see “Customizing Your Home Screen”

on page 40.

Google Search Bar

The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet

search engine powered by Google™.

1. From the main Home screen, tap the Google Search

bar .

2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the item you want

to search for, then tap .

3. Tap to use Google Voice Search. Follow the

on-screen instructions.

Menu Navigation

You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs

using both menus and widgets. Menus, sub-menus, and

features can be accessed by scrolling through the available

on-screen menus. Your phone originally has three home

screens but you can expand up to seven home screens.

Command Keys

Menu Key

Press

to display a context-sensitive menu of

options for the current screen or feature.

Home Key

Press

Home

to display the main Home screen. Press

and hold to display recently used apps and access the Task

manager.

Back Key

Press

Back

to return to the previous screen, option or

step.

Terms used in this user manual

Tap

Lightly touch items to select or launch them. For example:

•

Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or text.

•

Tap a menu item to select it.

•

Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.

Touch and Hold

Activate on-screen items by a touch and hold gesture. For

example:

•

Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 32

•

Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.

Swipe and Palm Swipe

To swipe, lightly drag your finger vertically or horizontally

across the screen. Use swipe when:

•

Unlocking the screen

•

Scrolling through the Home screen or a menu

To palm swipe, swipe the side of your hand horizontally

across the screen. Use palm swipe when:

•

Capturing the screen

Panning

To pan, touch and hold a selected icon, then move the device

to the left or right to reposition it to another page. You must

first activate Motion on your device. Use panning to:

•

Move icons on your Home screens or Application Menus to

another page.

Tilt

To activate the tilt feature, press and hold two points on the

screen then tilt the device back and forth to reduce or

enlarge the screen. Use tilt to:

•

Reduce or enlarge the screen in the Gallery or Browser.

Turn over

Turn your phone over so that the screen faces downward. For

example:

•

Mute incoming calls and playing sounds by turning your phone

over.

Using Motions and Gestures

By activating the various motion and gesture features, you

can access a variety of time saving functions.

Caution!

Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause

unintended results. To learn how to properly control

motions, tap

Apps

➔

Settings

➔

device

➔

Motions and gestures

. When tapped, each

entry comes with an on-screen tutorial.

• Air gesture

: Allows you to control your device by performing

motions above the sensor (without touching the device).

•Motion

: Allows you to control your device using natural

movements (on the screen).

• Palm motion

: Allows you to control your device by touching the

screen with your entire hand.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

• Gyroscope calibration

: Allows you to properly calibrate your

device’s touch screen.

To activate Air gesture:

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Motions and gestures

➔

Air gesture

2. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of

Air gesture

to turn it on .

The Air gesture icon will appear in the status bar.

3. Read the on-screen notification and tap

Note:

At least one feature must be activated before Air gesture

can be activated.

4. Tap

Learn about the sensor and icon

field to review

on-screen information about the Air gestures sensor

and related icon.

5. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of each

feature to turn it on .

To activate Motion:

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Motions and gestures

2. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of

Motion

turn it on .

3. Read the on-screen notification and tap

Note:

At least one feature must be activated before Motion can

be activated.

4. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of each

feature to turn it on .

To activate Palm Motion:

1. From the Home screen, press and then tap

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Motions and gestures

2. In a single motion touch and slide the

Palm motion

slider to the right to turn it on.

3. Read the on-screen notification and tap

Note:

At least one feature must be activated before Palm

motion can be activated.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 34

4. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of each

feature to turn it on .

For more information, refer to “Motions and Gestures” on

page 147.

Locking and Unlocking the Phone

To unlock your phone:

1. Press the lock button located on the upper

right side of your phone.

2. The lock screen will display with

Swipe screen to

unlock

displayed at the bottom of the screen.

3. Swipe the touch screen in any direction.

4. The Home screen will be displayed.

Note:

There are several additional ways you can lock your

screen. For more information, refer to “Lock Screen

Settings” on page 127.

Home Screen Overview

The main home screen is the starting point for many

applications and functions, and it allows you to add items

like application icons, shortcuts, folders, or Google widgets

to give you instant access to information and applications.

This is the default page and accessible from any menu by

pressing .

Navigating Through the Home Screens

Your phone originally has three home screens but you can

expand up to seven home screens. If you like, you can place

different applications on each of the home screens.



From the main Home screen, sweep the screen with

your finger in either direction. The main Home Screen

is located in the middle with a Home screen on each

side.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Navigating Through the Application Menus

Your phone initially has three Application Menus available.

Follow these steps to navigate through the Application

Menus:

1. At the Home screen, tap . The first Application

Menu will be displayed.

2. Sweep the screen left or right to access the other two

menus.

3. Tap one of the application icons.

Note:

As you add applications, the number of Application

menus that you have available will increase.

Navigating Using Sub-Menus

Sub-menus are available when you are at any Home screen

or have selected a feature or application such as Phone,

Contacts, Messaging, or Internet.

To access a sub-menu:

1. Press .

A sub-menu will appear at the bottom of the phone

screen.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 36

2. Tap an option.

Accessing Recently-Used Apps

1. Press and hold from any screen to open the

recently-used applications window.

2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.

– or –

Tap to go to the Task manager.

– or –

Tap to go to Google Search.

– or –

Tap to delete the record of all recently used

applications.

Using the Multi Window

This feature allows you to run multiple applications on the

current screen at the same time.

Note:

Only applications found within the Multi window panel

can be active atop another current application on the

screen.

When launching applications that contain multimedia

files (music/video), audio from both files will be played

simultaneously.

Sub-Menu items

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Activating and Deactivating Multi window

To activate Multi window:

1. Press and hold the

Back

key ( ). The Multi window

tab appears (by default) on the left side of the screen.

Note:

Initially open activation, the entire apps panel is briefly

displayed, then minimized to only show the tab.

2. Tap the tab to open the application panel showing

all the available Multi window apps.

To deactivate Multi window:



Press and hold the

Back

key ( ). This action hides

the Multi window tab from view.

Repositioning the Multi Window

The Multi window contains two components: tab and apps

panel. The tab can be manually moved across the screen.

The apps panel (containing the scrollable apps) can be

relocated to lock onto the different sides of the screen

(top/bottom/left/right).

To move the tab:

1. Activate the Multi window feature.

2. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for

approximately one-second, then slowly drag it to its

new location

along the current

screen edge.

Note:

This is a quick way to get the tab out of the way if you

can’t get to a button or option behind it.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 38

To relocate the Multi window apps panel:

1. Activate the Multi window feature.

2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the

scrollable apps).

3. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for

approximately one-second to detach it from the

screen (1), then slowly drag it to its new location

along

any other

available screen edge (2). You can move it to

the top, bottom, or either side.

Customizing the Multi Window apps

The applications found within the apps panel of the Multi

window can be organized by either being rearranged or

removed.

To rearrange the Multi window applications:

1. Activate the Multi window feature.

2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the

scrollable apps).

3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it

detaches from the panel, then carefully drag it to a new

location in the list of apps. Lift your finger or stylus off

the screen to let go of the app and drop it into its new

location.

To remove a Multi window application:

1. Activate the Multi window feature.

2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the

scrollable apps).

3. Tap the

Edit

button (located at the bottom of the list) to

reveal a staging area that can house any removed

applications from the Multi window panel.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

4. Tap

Done

once you have completed the removal

process.

To restore a Multi window application:

1. Activate the Multi window feature.

2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the

scrollable apps).

3. Tap the

Edit

button (located at the bottom of the list) to

reveal the staging area containing any previously

removed apps.

4. Locate the desired application.

5. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it

detaches from the staging area, then carefully drag it

to a new location in the current list of apps.

Using Multi Window to run multiple apps on the

same screen

Any of the apps found within the Multi window panel can be

run at the same time as a current on-screen app.

Once multiple apps are running on the same screen, you can

then choose to either swap their positions or maximize a

desired app.

Note:

Only applications found within the Multi-window panel

can be active atop another current application on the

screen.

When launching applications that contain multimedia

files (music/video), audio from both files will be played

simultaneously.

In this example we will be launching both the Internet and

Maps applications.

1. Launch an application such as Maps.

•

From the Home screen, tap

Internet

2. Activate the Multi window feature.

3. Tap the tab to display the apps panel.

4. Touch and hold the desired app, such as Maps, until it

detaches from the panel.

5. In a single motion, drag it over the current app and

drop the new Multi window app over either the top or

bottom area of the current on-screen app.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 40

Note:

Once two applications are running, the device displays a

split screen view containing both the initial app and the

new Multi window app. Each application is still

independent of the other.

To switch the arrangement of

the applications:

1. With the two

applications shown in a

split screen, tap the

Border bar to show the

on-screen icons.

2. Tap the desired

application area (top or

bottom).

3. Locate and tap

(

Switch app location

The current apps are

switched.

To increase the size of a desired application window:

1. With the two applications shown in a split screen,

locate the Border bar indicating the edge of the app

window.

2. In a single motion, touch and hold the Border bar then

drag it to resize the desired window.

To split the current applications:

1. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap

the Border bar to show the on-screen icons.

2. Tap the desired application area (top or bottom).

3. Locate and tap (

Maximize the app

). The current

apps are the both maximized.



To exit the Multi window app, tap .

Customizing Your Home Screen

You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:

•

Creating Shortcuts

•

Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts

•

Adding and Removing Widgets

•

Moving Icons in the Apps Menu

•

Creating Application Folders

App #1 Split/Maximize

App #2 Border Switch

Positionsbar

Exit

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

•

Adding a New Page to the Application Menu

•

Changing the Wallpaper

•

Adding and Deleting Home Screens

•

Moving Home Screens

Creating Shortcuts

Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen

Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts activate a

feature, action, or launch an application.

Note:

To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must

first be deleted from its current screen. Navigate to the

new screen, then add the shortcut.

Adding a shortcut from the Apps Menu

1. Press to activate the main Home screen.

2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.

3. Tap to display your current applications.

4. Scroll through the list and locate your desired

application.

5. Touch and hold the application icon. This creates an

immediate shortcut of the selected icon and closes the

Apps

tab.

6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the

current page. Once complete, release the screen to

lock the new shortcut into its new position on the

current screen.

Adding a shortcut via the Add to Home screen

1. Press to activate the main Home screen.

2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.

3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the Home screen.

4. Tap

Apps and widgets

Folder

, or

Page

5. Press and hold a shortcut from the available list and

position it on the current screen.

Deleting a shortcut

1. Press to activate the main Home screen.

2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it

from its location on the current screen.

3. Drag the icon over the

Remove

icon and release it.

As you place the shortcut into the Trash, both items

turn red.

Note:

This action does not delete the shortcut, it just removes

it from the current screen.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 42

Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts

You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the

exception of the

Apps

shortcut.

1. Press to activate the main Home screen.

2. Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to

replace, then drag it to an empty space on any Home

screen.

3. Scroll through the App menu to find the shortcut you

want to add as the new primary short cut.

4. Touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag it to the

empty space in the row of primary shortcuts.

The new primary shortcut will now appear on all Home

screens.

Adding and Removing Widgets

Widgets are self-contained applications that reside in either

your Widgets tab or on the main or extended Home screens.

Unlike a shortcut, the Widget appears as an on-screen

application.

Adding a Widget

1. Press to activate the main Home screen.

2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.

3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.

4. Tap

Apps and widgets

5. Tap the

Widgets

tab at the top of the screen.

6. Press and hold an available Widget to position it on the

current screen, then release the Widget.

Removing a Widget

1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it around

on the screen.

2. Drag the Widget up to the

Remove

icon and

release it.

As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn

red.

Note:

This action does not actually delete the Widget, it just

removes it from the current Home screen.

Moving Icons in the Apps Menu

1. Press to activate the main Home screen.

2. Tap to display your current applications.

3. Tap the

Apps

tab at the top of the screen if it is not

already selected.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

4. Press and tap

View type

5. Tap

Customizable grid

. A green circle will appear next

to the option.

6. Press and tap

Edit

7. Scroll through the list and locate the icon you wish to

move.

8. Touch and drag the icon to the position that you want.

To move to a different page, drag the icon to the edge

of the page until the page scrolls to the desired page.

9. Tap

Save

10. Press to return to the Home screen.

Creating Application Folders

You can create application folders to hold similar applications

if you wish.

To create a folder follow these steps:

1. Press to activate the main Home screen.

2. Tap to display your current applications.

3. Tap the

Apps

tab at the top of the screen if it is not

already selected.

4. Press and tap

Edit

5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like

to move to a folder.

6. Drag the icon down to the

Create folder

icon.

7. Enter a folder name and tap

A folder is displayed in the original place of the

application icon with the application icon displayed on

top of it. You can now drag other Apps into the folder.

8. To view information on an App, drag the App icon up to

the App info icon to view information on the

application.

9. Tap

Save

Adding a New Page to the Application Menu

You can add a new page to your application menu by

following these steps:

1. Press to activate the main Home screen.

2. Tap to display your current applications.

3. Tap the

Apps

tab at the top of the screen if it is not

already selected.

4. Press and tap

Edit

5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like

to move to a new page.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 44

6. Drag the icon down to the

Create page

icon.

7. Tap

Save

The app will appear on a new page.

Changing the Wallpaper

You can change the Wallpaper (background) of your home

screens by following these steps:

1. From any Home screen, touch and hold on an empty

area of the screen.

The

Home screen

window is displayed.

2. Tap

Set wallpaper

3. Select the location where you would like to change the

wallpaper. Tap

Home screen

Lock screen

, or

Home and

lock screens

4. Tap one of the following options:

•Gallery

: select a wallpaper from photographs you have taken

with your camera.

• Live wallpapers

: select an animated wallpaper. This option is

not available for the Lock screen option.

• Wallpapers

: select from many still-life wallpapers.

5. Select a wallpaper and tap

Set wallpaper

Done

, or

Cancel

Adding and Deleting Home Screens

You can add and delete Home screens. You can have up to

seven Home screens.

To add a new Home screen:

1. Press to activate the main Home screen.

2. Press and tap

Edit page

3. Tap the Home screen that contains .

A new screen is added.

4. If desired, touch and hold the new screen and drag it to

a different location.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

5. Press to return to the main Home screen.

You can now add items to your new Home screen.

To delete a Home screen:

1. Press to activate the main Home screen.

2. Press and tap

Edit page

3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to delete.

4. Drag it to the trash can located at the top of the screen.

The page will turn red.

5. If there are items on the Home screen, the

Remove

home screen page

prompt is displayed.

6. Tap

to delete the page and its contents, otherwise

tap

Cancel

7. Press to return to the main Home screen.

Moving Home Screens

You can arrange your Home screens in any order that you

want.

To move a Home screen, follow these steps:

1. Press to activate the main Home screen.

2. Press and tap

Edit page

3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to move.

4. Drag it to the location that you would like to place it.

In this example, the top right screen is moved to the

middle left position.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 46

When you move a Home screen, the other Home

screens are re-ordered automatically.

5. Press to return to the main Home screen.

Notification Bar

The Notification Bar includes a pull-down list to show

information about processes that are running, recent

notifications, and alerts. To display the Status indicator:



On the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification

Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down

vertically.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Clearing Notifications

To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:

1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification

Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down

vertically.

2. Tap the

Clear

button.

The notifications are cleared and the panel closes.

Accessing Additional Panel Functions

In addition to notifications, the Notification panel also

provides quick and ready access to separate device

functions. These can be quickly activated or deactivated by

toggling them on or off. You can choose the functions that

will be displayed.

1. From the notification panel, tap to display

additional options.

Clear Button

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Understanding Your Phone 48

The following functions (default) can either be

activated (green) or deactivated (gray): Wi-Fi, GPS,

Sound, Screen rotation, Bluetooth, Mobile data,

Blocking mode, Power saving, Screen Mirroring, Multi

window, S Beam, NFC, Air view, Air gesture, Driving

mode, Smart stay, Smart scroll, Sync, and Airplane

mode.

2. Tap then locate the Notifications panel area

located at the bottom of the Notifications panel screen.

3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired function

then drag it to the top row.

4. Tap

Brightness adjustment

to create a checkmark if you

want to be able to adjust the screen brightness via the

Notification panel.

5. Tap and then tap to display only your primary

functions.

Memory Card

Your device lets you use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC

card to expand available memory space. This secure digital

card enables you to exchange images, music, and data

between SD-compatible devices. This section addresses the

features and options of your device’s SD functionality. The

device has a USB SD card mode.

Mounting the SD Card

To store additional photos, music, videos, and other

applications, you must mount (install) the SD card prior to

use. Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection

with your computer.

1. Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot. For

more information, refer to “Removing and Installing the

Memory Card” on page 8.

2. Your SD card is scanned to see the available

information on it.

Unmounting the SD card

Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to

the SD card while removing it from the slot.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Storage

2. Scroll to the bottom of the display and tap

Unmount SD

card

3. Tap

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

For more information, refer to “Removing and Installing

the Memory Card” on page 8.

SD card Available Memory Status

To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Storage

2. The available memory for Device and SD card displays

under the

Total space

and

Available space

headings.

Erasing Files from the SD card

You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.

1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,

refer to “Mounting the SD Card” on page 48.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Storage

2. Tap

Format SD card

3. At the

Format SD card

confirmation prompt, tap

Format

SD card

Warning!

Performing the next step erases all data stored on

the SD card.

4. Tap

Delete all

to format or press to cancel.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Call Functions 50

Section 3: Call Functions

This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also

includes the features and functionality associated with

making or answering a call.

For more information, refer to “Call Settings” on page 133.

Displaying Your Phone Number



Tap ➔

Settings

➔

About device

➔

Status

. Your phone number is displayed in the

phone number

field.

Making a Call

1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen

keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.

2. Tap to make the call.

Note:

When you activate the

Auto redial

option in the Voice Call

menu, the phone will automatically redial up to 10 times

when the person does not answer the call or is already

on the phone. For more information, refer to “Call

Settings” on page 61.

Making an International Call

1. From the Home screen, tap , then touch and hold

. The + character appears.

2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code,

area code, and phone number.

•

If you make a mistake, tap

until the desired numbers

have been deleted.

3. Tap to make the call.

Manual Pause Dialing

To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in

your Contacts list:

1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen

keypad to enter the phone number.

2. Press to display the dialer sub-menu.

3. Tap

Add 3-sec pause

to add a three second pause, and

use the keypad to enter the additional numbers.

Tip:

You can create pauses longer than three seconds by

entering multiple three second pauses.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

4. Select

Add wait

to add a wait. A wait will pause the

calling sequence until you enter a number or press a

key.

5. Tap to make the call.

For more information, refer to “Adding Pauses to Contact

Numbers” on page 70.

Correcting an Entered Number

Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when

dialing.



After entering a number using the keypad:

•

If you make a mistake, tap

to erase a single character.

•

Press and hold

to erase the entire string of numbers.

Ending a Call



Tap the key.

Dialing a Recent Number

All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the

Call log. If the number or caller is listed in your Address

Book, the associated name is also displayed.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Tap the Logs tab.

A list of recent calls is displayed.

3. Tap the desired Contact to enter the

Details

page, then

tap to make a call.

Making Emergency Calls

If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn

on the phone, the

Insert SIM card to make calls

message

displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install

the SIM card.

Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call

with the phone; normal cell phone service is not available.

Making an Emergency Call without a SIM card

1. Tap

Emergency call

from the on-screen display to make

an emergency call.

2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap . Complete your call. During

this type of call, you will have access to the Speaker

mode, Keypad, and End Call features.

3. Tap to exit this calling mode.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Call Functions 52

Making an Emergency Call with a SIM card

The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency

number a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal

calling operations, you should first exit this mode.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Enter the emergency number (example: 911) and then

tap .

3. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will

have access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End

Call features.

Note:

This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly

than normal calling mode.

Making a Call Using Speed Dial

You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in your

Contacts List for speed dialing.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

to display

your Contacts List.

2. Press to display the Contacts List sub-menu.

3. Tap

Speed dial setting

4. The

Speed dial setting

screen displays showing the

numbers 1 through 100. The number 1 is reserved for

Voicemail.

5. Tap an unused number and the

Select contact

screen

displays.

6. Tap a contact to assign to the number. The selected

contact number will display in the speed dial number

box.

7. To remove a speed dial number or change the order,

press to display the Speed dial setting sub-menu.

8. Tap

Change order

Remove

9. To make a call using Speed Dial, tap ➔

Keypad

and from the Dialer, touch and hold the speed dial

number. If the speed dial number is more than 1 digit

long, enter the first digits, then hold the last digit.

Making a Call from the Address Book

You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the

SIM card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are

collectively called the Address Book.

For further details about the Address Book feature, see

“Finding an Address Book Entry” on page 71.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Answering a Call

When a call is received the phone rings and displays the

caller’s phone number, or name if stored in the Address

Book.

1. At the incoming call screen:

•

Touch and drag

in any direction to answer the call.

•

Touch and drag

in any direction to reject the call and

send it to your voicemail.

•

Touch and drag the

Reject call with message

tab upward and

tap a predefined text message to send to the caller.

–

I’m driving

–

I’m at the cinema

–

I’m in class

–

I’m in a meeting

–

Sorry, I’m busy. Call back later.

– or –

–

Tap

Create new message

to compose a new message.

2. Tap to end the call.

Note:

You can answer a call while using the Address Book or

other menu feature. After ending the call, the phone

returns to the previously active function screen.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Call Functions 54

Dialing Options

From the Home screen and Application menus, you have the

option to access the Dialer and initiate a call by tapping

➔

Keypad

. From the Dialer and the Contacts screen, the

following tabs are located at the top of your screen:

•

Keypad

: dials the current number entered using the on-screen

keypad.

•

Logs

: displays a list of all dialed, received, and missed calls.

•

Favorites

: displays your contacts that you have marked as

Favorites.

•

Contacts

: takes you to your Address Book where you can select a

contact to call.

After you begin to enter numbers, the

Add to Contacts

option

appears so you can save the Contact if needed.

Call Log

The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,

received, or missed in the Call log. The Call log displays the

details of the call.

1. From the Home screen, tap .

2. Tap the Logs tab.

A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller

is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is

displayed.

All calls made, received, and missed are listed. Types of calls

are identified by the following icons:

Calling Back a Missed Call

To call back a missed call number:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs .

A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller

is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is

displayed.

•

Incoming Calls

•

Outgoing Calls

•

Missed Calls

•

Rejected Calls

•

Auto Rejected Calls

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

2. Swipe the desired missed call to the right to call.

– or –

Swipe the desired missed call to the left to message.

Saving a Recent Call to your Address Book

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs .

A list of recent calls is displayed.

2. Tap the call you want to save to your Address Book.

3. The call detail page is displayed. Tap

Create contact

add the call to your Address Book.

The Create contact screen is displayed.

– or –

If you want to replace the number for an existing

contact, tap

Update existing

4. Enter information into the various fields using the

keypad.

5. Tap

Save

to save when you are finished.

For further details about the Address Book feature, see

“Adding a New Contact” on page 69.

Sending a Message to a Recent Call

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs .

A list of recent calls is displayed.

2. Swipe the entry you want to message to the left.

Add as new

Call the number Send a message

contact

Update an existing

contact

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Call Functions 56

3. At the Message screen, tap the empty text field and

use the on-screen keypad to type in a message.

4. When you are done with your message, tap to

send.

For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending

Messages” on page 103.

Deleting a Call from the Call Log

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs .

A list of recent calls is displayed.

2. Touch and hold the call you want to delete from the Call

log.

3. Tap Delete.

4. At the

Delete log

prompt, tap

Delete

The call is deleted from the Call log.

Adding a Call to the Reject List

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs .

A list of recent calls is displayed.

2. Touch and hold the call you want to add to the Reject

List.

3. Tap Add to reject list.

4. At the Add to reject list prompt, tap

Future calls from this number will be rejected and sent

to your voicemail.

Call Duration

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ Logs .

2. Press ➔

Call duration

3. The following times are displayed for Voice and Data:

•Last call

: shows the length of time for the last call.

• Dialed calls

: shows the total length of time for all calls made.

• Received calls

: shows the total length of time for all calls

received.

• All calls

: shows the total length of time for all calls made and

received.

4. You may reset these times to zero by pressing

then tapping

Reset

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Options During a Call

Your phone provides a number of control functions that you

can use during a call.

Adjusting the Call Volume

During a call, to adjust the volume, use the

Volume

keys on

the left side of the phone.



Press the

volume key to increase the volume level

and press the

Down

volume key to decrease the

volume level.

– or –

Quickly add more volume to the incoming audio by

tapping the on-screen

Extra volume

button .

From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ringer volume

using these same keys.

In-Call Options

During an active call there are several functions available by

tapping a corresponding on-screen button.

•

Hold

place the current active call on hold.

•

Add call

: displays the dialer so you can call another person.

•

Keypad

: displays the on-screen keypad, where you can

enter number using DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency).

•

End call

: terminates the call.

•

Speaker

: routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or

through the earpiece.

–

Tap

Speaker

to route the audio through the speaker. (You can

adjust the speaker volume using the volume keys.) A green line

will appear under the Speaker button.

–

Tap

Speaker

again

to use the phone’s earpiece (see

“Using

the Speakerphone During an Active Call”

on page 60). The

green line will disappear when Speaker is not activated.

•

Mute/Unmute

turn the onboard microphone either on or off.

–

Tap

Mute

during a call to mute the microphone. A green line

will appear under the Mute button.

–

Tap

Mute

again to unmute the microphone. The green line will

disappear when Mute is not activated.

•

Headset

connects to a Bluetooth headset.

–

Tap

Headset

during a call to activate a Bluetooth headset. A

green line will appear under the Headset button.

–

Tap

Headset

again to de-activate the Bluetooth headset. The

green line will disappear when the Headset is not activated.

•

Press

for more options:

–

Contacts

: allows you to go to your Contact list.

–

Memo

: allows you to write a memo.

–

Message

: allows you to write a message during a call.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Call Functions 58

Personalizing the Call Sound Setting

During a call it may be necessary to adjust the sound of the

incoming call by selecting an audio equalizer setting for the

current call.

1. From the call screen, tap .

2. Confirm the option is enabled .

3. Select an available option. Choose from: Adapt Sound,

Soft sound, Clear sound, and Off.

Activating Noise Reduction

During a call it may be necessary to activate the noise

reduction feature. Activating this feature can improve the

quality of your conversation by reducing ambient noise.

Noise reduction in on by default.

1. Press to turn

Noise reduction off

2. Press to turn

Noise reduction on

Placing a Call on Hold

You can place the current call on hold at any point during a

conversation. You can also make another call while you have

a call in progress if your network supports this service.

1. While on a call, tap

Hold

. This action places

the current caller on hold.

2. You can later reactivate this call by tapping Unhold

To make a new call while you have a call in progress

1. Tap

Hold

2. Tap

Add call

to display the dialer.

3. Enter the new number and tap .

Once connected, the active call will appear in a large

box at the top of your screen and the call on hold will

appear in a smaller box in the middle of your screen.

Switching Between Calls

When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may

switch between the two calls, changing the one on hold to

active and placing the other on hold.

1. Tap Swap.

The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the

previous call on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so

that you can continue conversing with that person. The

active call will appear in a green box.

2. Tap to end the currently active call.

Hold

Unhold

Hold

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

To end a specific call

1. Tap

Swap

until the call you want to end appears in a

green box.

2. Tap to end the specific call.

3. Tap to end the remaining call.

To answer a call while you have a call in progress

You can answer another call while you have a call in progress

if you have activated your Call waiting feature. Otherwise, the

other call will go to your Voicemail box. For more information,

refer to “Additional settings” on page 135.

1. Tap and slide to the right to answer another call.

2. Tap

Putting "Name/Number" on hold

to put the first call

on hold.

– or –

Tap

Ending call with "Name/Number"

to end the first

call.

3. To switch between the two calls, tap Swap.

•Swap

: Places the current call on hold and then activates the

previous call. The active call will appear in a green box. Tap

Swap

again to switch back.

To end a call on hold

1. Tap to disconnect the active call.

2. The call on hold will now become the active call. Tap

to end the call.

3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)

The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a

series of incoming calls and place them on hold. If this

service is supported by the network, all calls can be joined

together. You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting

tone.

Note:

The Merge option combines all of the calls you have

established with your phone (both active and on hold).

Swap places the current call on hold and then activates

the previous call.

This feature joins all of the calls you have established with

your phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call.

1. Tap and slide to the right to answer the call.

2. Tap and slide to the right to answer the next call.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Call Functions 60

3. Tap

Putting "Name/Number" on hold

to put the first call

on hold.

4. Join the first two callers into a single multi-party call by

tapping Merge .

5. To temporarily leave the conference call, tap

Hold

To rejoin the conference call tap

Unhold

6. Tap to end the call.

Using the Speakerphone During an Active Call

While in an active call, it is possible to enable the

speakerphone feature.

1. Tap

Speaker

The

Speaker

button now appears as and the

speakerphone is activated.

2. Use the

Volume

keys (located on the left side of your

phone) to adjust the volume.

3. To deactivate the speakerphone, tap

Speaker

Important!

For more information, refer to “Responsible

Listening” on page 223.

Switching off the Microphone (Mute)

You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so

that the other person cannot hear you.

Example:

You wish to say something to person in the room,

but do not want the person on the phone to hear

you.

To mute your phone during a call

1. Tap Mute .

The

Mute

button now appears as and Mute is

activated.

2. Tap Mute to deactivate the Mute function and

reactivate the microphone.

Bluetooth headset

1. Tap Headset .

2. The phone will scan for your Bluetooth headset. When

found, connect to the headset.

The

Headset

button now appears as and the

Bluetooth headset is activated.

3. Tap Headset to deactivate the Bluetooth headset

and reactivate the phone speaker.

Merge

Hold

Unhold

Speaker

Mute

Headset

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Searching for a Number in Address Book

1. During the active call, press then tap

Contacts

2. Tap the Address Book entry.

For further details about the Address Book feature, see

“Finding an Address Book Entry” on page 71.

Call waiting

The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming

call while you have a call in progress, if this service is

supported by the network, and you must first activate the

Call Waiting feature:



From the Home screen, tap ➔

➔

Call settings

➔

Additional settings

➔

Call waiting

You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting

tone.

Call forwarding

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔

Call settings

➔

Additional settings

➔

Call forwarding

2. Tap one of the following options:

• Always forward

: allows you to forward all voice calls.

• Forward when busy

allows you to forward voice calls to a

designated number instead of your voice mail number if you

are on another phone call.

• Forward when unanswered

: allows you to forward voice calls

to a designated number instead of your voicemail number

when there is no answer on your phone. You can also select

the amount of time that the phone delays before forwarding.

• Forward when unreachable

: allows you to forward voice calls

to a designated number instead of your voicemail number

when you are not in an area covered by your service provider or

when your phone is switched off.

Call Settings

To access the Call settings menu:



From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔

Call

settings

– or –



From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

For detailed information on all of the call settings, see “Call

Settings” on page 133.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Entering Text 62

Section 4: Entering Text

This section describes how to select the desired text input

method when entering characters into your phone. This

section also describes the predictive text entry system that

reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering

text.

Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that

can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or

sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when

entering text.

Text Input Methods

There are three text input methods available:

•

Google Voice typing

: allows you to enter text by speaking.

•

Samsung keyboard (default)

: Samsung’s on-screen

QWERTY keypad that can be used in both portrait and

landscape orientation.

•

Swype

: a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead

of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each

letter of a word.

To change the input method, see “Keyboards and Input

Methods” on page 142.

Entering Text Using the Samsung

Keyboard

From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone

counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. The on-screen

QWERTY keypad will display.

New

Paragraph

Text Input Mode

Shift

Key Delete

Key

Space Bar

Voice Typing

and More Options

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad

There are two main keypad layout keys that will change the

on-screen keys within the QWERTY keypad.

The available Text Input modes are:

Sym

and

Abc

Note:

When in

Abc

mode, the

Sym

button will appear. When in

Sym

mode, the

Abc

ABC

abc

button will appear.

Using ABC Mode

1. If desired, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a

Landscape orientation.

2. When you tap the

Enter message

field, the following

screen displays:

3. Tap the desired alphabetic characters.

4. The screen initially opens in ABC mode. After typing the

first letter, the shift key ( ) will change to

and following letters will be lowercase.

5. Tap to input another upper-case letter or tap

twice to switch to ABC mode. The shift key will

change to in ABC mode. All following letters will

be uppercase until you tap the shift key again.

Symbol/Numeric Mode

: activates the number,

symbol, and emoticon keys.

ABC Mode

: activates the default alphabet keys.

Can also be set to

Abc

abc

by using the shift

() key.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Entering Text 64

Using Symbol/Numeric Mode

Use Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or

emoticons.

1. Rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape

orientation.

2. Tap at the bottom of the screen. The following

screen displays:

3. Tap the desired number, symbol, or emoticon

characters.

4. Tap the button to access additional symbols.

5. Tap to return to Abc mode.

Predictive Text

By using the Predictive Text option, you can have next-letter

prediction and regional error correction, which compensates

for pressing the wrong keys on the QWERTY keyboard.

Predictive text is turned on by default.

1. Press and hold on the keyboard, then tap

2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the

Predictive text

field, to .

3. In the text portion of the message screen, begin typing

a word. A list of word options is displayed. Tap one of

the words to replace the word that has already been

typed or scroll the line of words to the left for more

word choices.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

4. Continue typing your message. Tap to send the

message or press for more options. For more

information, refer to “Creating and Sending Messages”

on page 103.

Note:

You can also use Predictive Text mode in the portrait

orientation.

Entering Text Using Handwriting

You can enter text simply by using your finger to handwrite

letters on your screen.

1. Press and hold on the keyboard, then tap

2. Use your finger tip to write out each character. You can

print or use cursive.

3. You can write out your entire message using the

Handwriting feature or tap to switch back to

Samsung keyboard mode.

Samsung Keyboard Settings

For information on how you can configure your Samsung

keyboard settings, see “Samsung Keyboard settings” on

page 143.

Using the Google Voice Typing Feature

You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice

typing feature.

1. Tap on the keyboard.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Entering Text 66

2. At the

Speak now

prompt, speak clearly and distinctly

into the microphone.

3. If the red microphone turns gray, then the feature has

timed out and you should tap the microphone icon to

start again.

The text is displayed in the message as you are

speaking.

4. After you have quit speaking for several seconds, tap

to return to the keyboard.

Note:

The feature works best when you break your message

down into smaller segments.

Entering Text Using Swype

Swype™ is a text input method that allows you to enter a

word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter,

lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error

correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the

next word. Swype also includes a tapping predictive text

system.

The following example shows how to enter the word “This”.

Put your finger down on the “T”, and without lifting, glide it

to the “h”, then to the “i” then over to the “s”.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Enabling and Configuring Swype

The Samsung keyboard is the default text input method, so

to use Swype, you must first change the default keyboard

setting.

To enable Swype:

1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and

drag down from the Notifications area then tap

Select input method

2. Tap the

Swype

radio button. It will turn green.

The Swype keyboard is displayed.

Swype Settings

For information on how you can configure your Swype

settings, see “Swype Keypad Settings” on page 144.

Swype Text Entry Tips

You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video

or tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following

Swype text entry tips.

•

Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such

as pp in apple).

•

Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a

selection.

•

Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter

contractions.

•

Double-tap on the word you want to change to correct a

misspelled word, then tap the delete key to erase one character.

Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Contacts and Your Address Book 68

Section 5: Contacts and Your Address Book

This section allows you to manage your daily contacts by

storing their name and number in your Address Book.

Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group.

AT&T Address Book Activation

When you access the AT&T Address Book, the network

backup service, contacts are automatically synchronized

between your phone and online address book. The changes

you make are automatically saved and if you ever upgrade,

damage, or lose your phone, you can easily restore your

contacts onto your new phone.

To activate the AT&T Address Book:

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

Your Address Book is displayed.

2. If you have not synchronized your phone with your

online AT&T Address Book recently, the

AT&T Address

Book

screen is displayed. Tap

Start Sync

if you want to

synchronize your Address Book.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Your AT&T Address Book is Ready to Use. You can now make

a call or send a message through your Address Book.

You can also manage your Address Book on the web

http://www.att.com/addressbook

Synchronizing your AT&T Address Book

If you ever upgrade, damage, or lose your phone, you can

easily restore your contacts onto your new phone by

following these steps:

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

2. Press ➔

Settings

➔

AT&T Address Book

3. At the AT&T Address Book screen, tap

Yes

synchronize your phone with your online Address Book.

4. If there are existing contacts on your phone, you will be

prompted if you would like to remove them first. Tap

Yes

Note:

You must first copy any contacts that exist on your SIM

card to your phone. For more information, refer to

“Copying Contacts to the Phone” on page 79.

Your phone is synchronized.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

5. At the

Your AT&T Address Book is Ready for Use

prompt,

tap

Your Contact list is displayed.

Adding a New Contact

Use the following procedure to add a new contact to your

Address Book.

Saving a Number from the Home screen

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

➔ .

2. At the

Save contact to

prompt, tap on

Device

SIM

, or

Account name.

3. Tap the image icon and assign a picture to the new

entry by choosing one of three options:

•Image

: retrieve a previously stored image from your Gallery or

from your My files folder and assign it to this entry. Tap an

image to assign the image to the contact, then tap

Done

• Pictures by people

: retrieve a previously shared image from

your Gallery.

• Take picture

: use the camera to take a new picture and assign

it to this entry, then tap

Done

•S Memo

: use an image from one of your S Memos.

•Remove

: although not an option with a new entry, deletes any

previously assigned image on an existing contact.

4. Tap the

Name

field and use the on-screen keypad to

enter the full name. For more information, refer to

“Entering Text” on page 62.

– or –

Tap next to the

Name

field to display additional

name fields.

5. Tap the

Phone number

field.

The numerical keypad is displayed.

The

Mobile

button initially displays next to the

Phone number

field. If you want to add a phone number

that is not a mobile number, tap the

Mobile

button and

select from Mobile, Home, Work, Work fax, Home Fax,

Pager, Other, Custom (add your own label), or Callback.

6. Enter the phone number.

Tap to add another Phone number field or tap

to delete a field.

7. Tap any of the following fields that you want to add to

your new contact:

Mobile

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Contacts and Your Address Book 70

• Groups

: assign the contact to Not assigned, ICE - emergency

contacts, Co-workers, Family, or Friends.

•Ringtone

: adds a field used to assign a message tone that will

sound when messages are received from this contact.

• Message alert

: allows you to set the ringtone for your

message alerts.

• Vibration pattern

: allows you to set the specific type of

vibration.

•Add another field

tap this button to add another field such as

Phonetic name, Organization, Email, IM, Address, Notes,

Nickname, Website, Internet call, Events, or Relationship.

8. Tap

Save

to save the new contact.

Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers

When you call automated systems, you are often required to

enter a password or account number. Instead of manually

entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers

in your Contacts along with special characters called pauses

and waits. A pause will stop the calling sequence for two

seconds and a wait will pause the calling sequence until you

enter a number or press a key.

To add a pause or a wait to an existing Contact:

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

, and then tap

the name or number to open the Contact.

2. Tap to edit.

3. Tap the phone number field.

4. Tap the screen at the position where the pause or wait

needs to be added.

5. Tap .

6. Tap

Pause

to add a two-second pause or tap

Wait

add a wait, and use the keypad to enter the additional

numbers. A pause will be displayed as a comma (,) and

a wait will be displayed as a semi-colon (;).

7. Tap

Save

to save your changes, or tap

Cancel

discard.

Editing an Existing Contact

When editing an existing contact, you can tap a field and

change or delete the information, or you can add additional

fields to the contact’s list of information.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

2. Press and hold the Contact that you want to edit.

3. Tap

Edit

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

4. Tap any of the fields to add, change, or delete

information.

5. Tap

Save

to save the edited information.

Using Contacts

Dialing or Messaging from Address Book

Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,

you can dial them easily and quickly by either using their SIM

card location number or by using the Search field to locate

the entry.

From the Address book, you can also send messages.

Finding an Address Book Entry

You can store phone numbers and their corresponding

names onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory.

The two locations are physically separate but are used as a

single entity, called the Address Book.

Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum

number of phone numbers the SIM card can store and how

they are stored may differ.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

2. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), tap a

letter on the right side of the display to quickly jump to

the contacts beginning with that letter.

3. Tap the contact you wish to call or message.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Contacts and Your Address Book 72

4. Tap the phone icon to make a phone call or tap the

message icon to send a message.

For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending

Messages” on page 103.

Tip:

From the Contact list, sweep right over a listing to make a

call. Sweep left over a listing to send a message.

Joining Contacts

Joining Contact Information

Many people now maintain multiple email accounts, social

networking logins, and other similar account information. For

example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a

corporate email account login because they are maintained

separately and for different groups of people.

This device can synchronize with multiple accounts such as

Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Corporate email, and Google.

When you synchronize your phone with these accounts, each

account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list.

If one of your contacts (Amy Smith, for example) has a

regular email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also

has a Facebook account under her maiden and married

name, as well as a Yahoo! chat account, when you merge

these accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of her

entries and view the information in one record.

The next time you synchronize your phone with your

accounts, any updates that contacts make to email account

names, email addresses, etc. automatically update in your

contacts list.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

For more information about synchronizing accounts, see

“Synchronizing Accounts” on page 74.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to join to

another entry).

Note

: typically this is the same contact

with a different name or account information.

3. Press ➔

Join contact

The contact list is displayed.

Note:

Only contacts stored on your phone can be joined.

4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to

join). The second contact is now joined with the first

and the account information is merged into one screen.

Note:

The information is still maintained in both entries, but

displays in one record for easier viewing when you join

the contacts.

5. Tap area under the

Connection

bar to view the contact

information you joined. The contacts and information

displays with an icon next to the contact name to

indicate what type of account information is contained

in the entry.

Unjoining a Contact

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you

want to unlink an entry).

Note

: typically this is the same

contact with a different name or account information.

3. Tap the area under the

Connection

bar.

4. Tap the minus sign next to entry in which you

want to unjoin.

5. At the

Separate contact

prompt, tap

The contact is now separated and no longer displays in

the merged record screen.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Contacts and Your Address Book 74

Marking a Contact as Default

When you use messaging type applications, the application

needs to know which information is primary (default) in a

contact entry list. For example, you may have three different

contact records for John Smith, so the application will be

looking for the “default” number or entry.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

2. Tap a Contact name.

3. Press ➔

Mark as default

. The Mark as default

screen displays radio buttons next to the contact

names or phone numbers of all the linked contacts.

The radio button next to the default contact will be

green.

4. To change the default contact, tap the radio button next

to another entry that you want to be the default. The

radio button will turn green, then tap

Done

Synchronizing Accounts

From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications

to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if

you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After

determining how you want the accounts to synchronize,

indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts

list.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

2. Press then tap

Accounts

If you have previously added any accounts, the

Sync

settings

prompt is displayed with your current accounts

listed.

3. Tap an account that you would like to synchronize.

4. At the

Sync settings

screen, tap the options that you

would like to synchronize for that account.

5. Tap

Sync now

to synchronize the account.

The account is synchronized.

6. Press to return to the Contacts list.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Note:

You can also synchronize your accounts using the

Settings menu. For more information, refer to

“Synchronizing Accounts” on page 151.

Address Book Options

You can access Address Book options while at the main

Address Book page or while in the details page for a specific

entry.

Options in Address Book

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

then press

2. The following options are displayed:

• Delete:

allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.

• SIM Management

: allows you to copy contacts from your

phone to your SIM card or from your SIM card to your phone.

You can also delete contacts from your SIM.

•Import/Export

: allows you to move contacts to or from your

memory card or USB storage. You can also send a namecard

via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi

Direct.

•Accounts

: allows you to add and manage your Samsung,

ChatON, Google, LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol),

and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts. Tap Add account

and then follow the on-screen instructions.

• Speed dial setting

: allows you to set up speed-dialing. For

more information, refer to

“Making a Call Using Speed

Dial”

on page 52.

• Send message/email

: allows you to send a text or message.

• Contacts to display

: You can choose to display all of your

contacts or only display contacts on your Phone, SIM, or

contacts stored to other accounts. You can also tap Customized

list to change other options on how your contacts are displayed.

• Settings

: allows you to choose set the following options:

–

Only contacts with phones

: allows you to only display

contacts that have phone numbers.

–

List by

: allows you to sort by First name or Last name.

–

Display contacts by

: allows you to sort by First name or Last

name first.

–

Service numbers

: allows you to

display or edit your service

numbers.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Contacts and Your Address Book 76

–

Contact sharing settings

: allows you to send all or individual

contacts via Bluetooth in the form of namecards.

–

AT&T Address Book

: allows you to access the AT&T Address

Book so you can sync your contacts.

•Help

: provides additional information on using your contacts.

Options at Selected Contact Screen

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

2. Tap a contact and at the contact’s display screen, press

3. The following options are displayed:

•History

: allows you to view the phone and message history for

the contact.

•Edit

: allows you to edit the contact’s information.

•Delete

: allows you to delete the contact from your Address

Book.

• Join contact

: allows you to join contacts with other contacts

(only displays when contact is saved to SIM).

• Separate contact

: allows you to separate contacts that have

been joined. This option only appears if the contact has been

joined.

• Mark as default

: when you have multiple contacts linked

together, you can mark one of them as default (only displays

when contact is saved to the phone). For more information,

refer to

“Marking a Contact as Default”

on page 74.

• Assign speed dial

: allows you to assign this contact to your

speed dial list. For more information, refer to

“Making a Call

Using Speed Dial”

on page 52.

• Share namecard via

: allows you to send the contact’s

information via Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or

Wi-Fi Direct.

• Add to/Remove from reject list

: allows you to add or remove

the contact from your reject list. If they call while being on the

reject list, the call will be sent directly to voice mail.

•Print contact info

: allows you to print the contact’s namecard

to a Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.

• Add shortcut to home

: allows you to place a shortcut for this

contact on your Home screen.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Groups

Adding a Contact to a Group

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

2. Press and hold a contact that you would like to add to a

group.

3. Tap

Add to group

4. Tap a group entry.

5. Tap

Save

The contact is added to the group.

Removing a Contact From a Group

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

➔

Groups

2. Tap a group entry.

3. Press ➔

Remove member

4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this

group. A green checkmark will appear next to their

name.

5. Tap

Done

The contacts are now removed from the group.

Creating a New Group

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

➔

Groups

➔ ➔

Create

2. Tap the

Group name

field and use the on-screen

keypad to enter a new group name. For more

information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 62.

3. Tap

Group ringtone

to choose a ringtone for assignment

to this new group. Tap a ringtone to hear how it

sounds, then tap

– or –

Tap

Add

to select a ringtone from your music files.

4. Tap

Message alert

to choose an alert tone for

assignment to this new group, then tap

5. Tap

Vibration pattern

to choose a vibration audio file for

assignment to this new group, then tap

– or –

Tap

Create

and follow the on-screen instructions to

create your own vibration pattern.

6. Tap

Add member

to add contacts to the new group.

7. Tap each contact you want to add to create a

checkmark. You can also tap

Select all

Groups

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Contacts and Your Address Book 78

8. Tap

Done

9. Tap

Save

to save the new Group category.

Editing a Caller Group

To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as

part of the selected group.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

➔

Groups

2. Tap a group entry.

3. Press ➔

Edit

4. Make modifications to the

Group name

Group ringtone

Vibration pattern

fields.

5. Tap

Add member

to add more contacts to this group.

6. Tap

Done

7. Tap

Save

to save the edited Group category.

Address Book Favorites

Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,

you can add them to your Favorites list.

To view your Favorites list:



From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

➔

Favorites

Adding Favorites to your Address Book

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that

you want to add to your favorites list.

3. Tap

Add to favorites

on the displayed list.

4. A gold star will appear next to the contact in the

Address Book.

Removing Favorites from your Address Book

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that

you want to remove from your favorites list. Contacts in

your Favorites list will have a gold star.

3. Tap

Remove from favorites

on the displayed list.

4. The gold star will no longer appear next to the contact

in the Address Book.

Managing Address Book Contacts

You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the

Phone and SIM contacts on your phone.

Groups

Favo rites

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Copying Contacts to the SIM Card

Note:

When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card,

only the name, phone number, and email address are

available as fields. Also, if you move the SIM card to

another phone that does not support additional fields on

the SIM card, this additional information may not be

available.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

➔ ➔

SIM Management

2. Tap

Copy Contacts to SIM

The phone then displays a list of your current phone

contacts.

3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to

those entries you wish to have copied to the SIM card.

•

Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the

SIM or tap

Select all

to place a checkmark alongside all

entries.

4. Tap

Done

to copy.

5. At the

Copy to SIM

display, tap

The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card.

Copying Contacts to the Phone

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

➔ ➔

SIM Management

2. Tap

Copy Contacts from SIM

3. At the

Create contact under account

prompt, tap on

Device

or an account name that you would like to copy

the contact to.

The phone then displays a list of your current contacts

stored on your SIM card.

4. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to

those entries you wish to have copied to your phone.

•

Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to

your phone or tap

Select all

to place a checkmark alongside all

entries.

5. Tap

Done

to copy.

The selected numbers are copied.

Deleting Contacts from the SIM card

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

➔ ➔

SIM Management

2. Tap

Delete Contacts from SIM

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Contacts and Your Address Book 80

The phone then displays a list of your current SIM

contacts.

3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to

those entries you wish to have deleted from the SIM

card.

•

Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the

SIM or tap

Select all

to place a checkmark alongside all

entries.

4. Tap

Delete

5. At the

Delete Contacts from SIM

prompt, tap

The selected numbers are deleted from the SIM card.

Deleting Address Book Entries from the Phone

You can delete Phone or SIM entries from your phone’s

memory.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that

you want to delete.

3. Tap

Delete

on the displayed list.

4. At the

Delete

prompt, tap

to delete the contact or

Cancel

to exit.

Using the Service Dialing Numbers

You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN)

assigned by your service provider. These numbers may

include emergency numbers, customer service numbers, and

directory inquiries.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

➔ ➔

Settings

2. Tap

Service numbers

3. Scroll through the available numbers (if available).

4. Tap a number and the call is made.

Note:

This menu is available only when your SIM card

supports Service Dialing Numbers.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Section 6: Multimedia

This section explains how to use the multimedia features of

your phone, including Samsung Hub, Samsung Link, AT&T

Locker, Music, Google Play Music, Video, Play Movies & TV,

Gallery, Camera, and Camcorder.

Samsung Hub

Samsung Hub makes it easy to find, sample, and purchase

movies, TV shows, books, games, and music, in one user-

friendly location. With hundreds of titles available,

entertaining your family on-the-go has never been easier.

You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch

from any location. Samsung Hub is your gateway to mobile

entertainment.

You must have an active Samsung Account to purchase and

rent content via Samsung Hub.

Note:

Samsung Hub usage is based on service availability.

Important!

You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G/LTE

connection to preview and download a media file.

The internal memory acts as a storage location for

your downloaded rental or purchase.

Important!

The Samsung account manages the access

information (username/password) to several

applications, such as Samsung Link, Chat On, and

Samsung Hub.

Creating a New Samsung Hub Account

Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an

account. Enter the required information.

1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung

account.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Samsung Hub

3. When prompted to connect via mobile networks, select

either

Cancel

Connect

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Multimedia 82

4. If notified your Samsung account is not yet active or

verified, tap

. You must be signed in to your

Samsung account to use the application’s various

features.

Tip:

In some cases it might be necessary to sign in to your

Samsung account via the application. Press and then

select

Note:

Your Samsung Hub account is managed by the Samsung

account application. This application manages your user

profile information.

5. Press ➔

Help

for additional information.

Using Samsung Hub

The main Samsung Hub screen provides an overview of all

the available categories on one page such as: Music, Video,

Books, and Games. The overview page also displays recently

added media that you can rent or purchase.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Samsung Hub

•

The Overview screen (landing page) displays an main access

for all available categories and recently available content for

purchase or rental.

2. Scroll across the screen to select from the following

available pages:

•MUSIC

: displays featured Music content available for purchase/

stream from the Music store & Radio. This page also allows you

to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Music

store page by clicking on the Music link at the top of the page.

•VIDEO

: displays featured film and TV content available for

purchase/rent from the video store. This page also allows you

to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Movie &

TV store page by clicking the Video link at the top of the page.

• BOOKS

: displays featured Book content available for purchase

from the Book store. This page also allows you to search for

new content, or navigate directly to the Book store page by

clicking the Books link at the top of the page.

•GAMES

: displays featured Game content available from the

Game store. This page also allows you to search for new

content, or navigate directly to the Game store page by clicking

the Games link a the top of the page.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

3. To purchase or view featured content in more detail,

tap on any content (Thumbnail or text) to navigate to

the product detail page.

4. Depending on the content, you can either purchase,

rent, or stream the content directly from the product

detail page.

5. Choose a payment method, then follow the on-screen

instructions.

Samsung Hub Notices

•

Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after

you create an account in Samsung Hub.

•

Media Content that is purchased and downloaded may be viewed

concurrently on up to five (5) devices with Samsung Hub (or “the

service”) that are also registered to the same account.

•

You may remove a device from your account no more than once

every 90 days.

•

You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as

you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media

Content later subject to content re-download availability and

content provider permissions.

•

You may need network coverage to access Media Content you

have acquired through the Service.

•

You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity to download Media

Content.

•

Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be

viewable on only 1 device in your account at a time.

•

Media Content is downloaded and saved to your authorized

device's SD card. No SD Card included out of box.

•

Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks

where there is a weak signal.

•

You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)

license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the

Media Content has been buffered.

•

You must finish watching Media Content within the time limit set

out for each piece of content (which may be as short as 24

consecutive hours).

•

Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not

extend the available viewing time.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Multimedia 84

•

In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period

of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)

after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin

viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental

transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented

Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four

(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the

viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).

•

Unless otherwise restricted by the Content Providers, you can

download Media Content to your TV using HDMI connections;

otherwise, you cannot play Media Content downloaded from your

mobile device output.

Samsung Link

This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung

device with your TV, streams content, and even keeps tabs

on who calls or sends text messages with real-time,

on-screen monitoring. Samsung Link makes staying

connected easy.

Samsung Link allows users to share their in-device media

content with other external devices using DLNA certified™

(Digital Living Network Alliance) Devices. These external

devices must also be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can

be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer.

Important!

You must first connect both of your communicating

devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an

active/registered Samsung account prior to using

this application. For more information, refer to “Wi-

Fi Settings” on page 119. For more information,

refer to “Creating a Samsung Account” on page

14.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Samsung Link

2. Tap

to sign into your Samsung Account if you

have not already done so.

3. If prompted, read the on-screen message about

network charges and tap

to continue and return to

the main Samsung Link screen.

4. Tap

Start

and follow the on-screen prompts.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

5. Scroll across the application screen to view either

MY RECENT CONTENT

DEVICES & STORAGE

6. The DEVICES & STORAGE screen contains two separate

streaming media options:

•Registered storage

: allows you to receive and playback media

stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by

allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming

content.

• Registered devices

: allows you to stream/share selected

multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device

connected to the same Wireless Access Point.

Configuring Samsung Link Settings

Samsung Link must first be configured prior to its initial use.

You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-Fi, Items

to share, source server address, and external device

acceptance rights.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Samsung Link

➔

DEVICES & STORAGE tab

2. Press and then tap

Settings

and configure the

following settings as desired:

•Registered storage

: allows you to add a Web storage location.

Without a storage service/location added, you will not be able

to use Samsung Link.

• My device

: displays your device name as it is used with

Samsung Link. Tap to change the device name.

•Save to

: allows you to save your media to your internal phone

memory or to an SD card.

• Auto upload

: allows you to enable automatic upload of images

from your device to those storage locations specified within the

Web storage list.

Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on

•Video optimization

: allows you to setup the video quality for

streamed video content.

Touch and slide the slider to the right to

turn it on .

• Password lock

: allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link

by requiring a user enter the currently active and associated

Samsung account password.

Touch and slide the slider to the

right to turn it on .

• My account

: displays Samsung account information.

•Customer support

: allows you to contact the Samsung Link

team via a new email from an available email account.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Multimedia 86

• About this service

: displays application information

Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target

Device

Important!

Make sure all communicating devices are

connected to the same Wi-Fi.

1. Launch AllShare Play/Samsung Link on the target

device (such as an Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc.).

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Samsung Link

Note:

You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before

you can use this feature.

3. Tap your device name from the

Registered devices

area.

4. Tap an available category tab (Pictures, Music, Movies,

Files, or Info) and select a file.

•

A file with in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely

on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your

device to access the file currently stored on your services’

servers.

5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to

place a green check mark alongside it.

6. Tap (

Stream to connected devices

) and select an

available target device to begin streaming.

7. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the

on-screen

Allow

button to continue.

Note:

At this stage your device is requesting access to share

media with the external source.

8. Confirm (

Samsung Link Controller enabled

)

appears in the Notification area at the top of the device

to indicate you are using your device as the media

source.

AT&T Locker

AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your

photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient

place; the AT&T cloud.

1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already

signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a

New Google Account” on page 14.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

AT&T Locker

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

3. At the AT&T Locker home screen, tap

to create

an account or tap

if you already have an

account.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Locker.

Music

Music is an application that can play music files. Music

supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+, eAAC+, MP3,

WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching Music allows you to

navigate through your music library, play songs, and create

playlists (music files bigger than 300 KB are displayed).

Playing Music

1. Tap ➔

Music

2. Tap a library category at the top of the screen (Songs,

Playlists, Albums, Artists, Music square, or Folders) to

view the available music files.

3. Scroll through the list of songs and tap an entry to

begin playback.

4. The following Music controls are available:

Pause the song.

Start the song after pausing.

Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to

previous song.

Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to

go to next song.

Volume control.

Volume control showing volume muted.

Plays the entire song list once.

Replays the current list when the list ends.

Repeats the currently playing song.

Shuffles the current list of songs randomly.

Songs play in order and are not shuffled.

Lists the current playlist songs.

Displays the current song in the player window.

Assign the current song as a Favorite.

Streams the current music file to another device

via Samsung Link.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Multimedia 88

Music Options

To access additional options, follow these steps:

1. While in Music, press .

2. The follow options are available before you play music:

Note:

The following options may or may not appear depending

on whether or not music is actually playing. Also,

options will be different if the song you are listening to is

in a playlist.

•Add to playlist:

allows you to add the current music file to a

selected playlist.

• Via Bluetooth

: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth

headset.

•Delete

: deletes the music file.

•Search

: allows you to search your device for a certain song.

•Settings

: allows you to change your Music settings. For more

information, refer to

“Music Settings”

on page 88.

•End

: allows you to end the Music app.

Music Settings

The Music Settings menu allows you to set preferences for

the Music app such as whether you want the music to play in

the background, sound effects, and how the music menu

displays.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Music

2. Press ➔

Settings

3. Select one of the following settings:

•SoundAlive

: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop,

Rock, Jazz, Dance, Classic, etc.

• Adapt sound

: allows you to set Adapt sound on when your are

listening with earphones to alert of incoming calls and

notifications.

• Play speed

: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and

2.0X using the slider.

• Music menu

: this menu allows you to select which categories

you want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres,

Music square, Folders, Composers, Years, Most played,

Recently played, or Recently added. Tap each item that you

want to display in the Music menu.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

• Music auto off

: when activated, music will automatically turn

off after a set interval.

•Lyrics

: when activated, displays lyrics when available.

• Smart volume

: automatically adjusts each track’s volume to an

equal level.

• Voice control

: allows you to use voice commands to control

the Music app.

Using Playlists

Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media

which can then be grouped into a list for later playback.

These Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music

options menu or from within a 3rd party music application

(such as Windows Media Player) and then downloaded to the

handset.

Creating a Playlist

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Music

2. Tap the

Playlists

tab.

3. Press ➔

Create playlist

4. Type a name for this playlist in the field and tap

Adding Music to a Playlist

To add files to the playlist:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Music

2. Tap the

Playlists

tab.

3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.

4. Tap (

Add music)

5. Tap a music file, or tap

Select all

to add all the music

tracks to this playlist then tap

Done

Removing Music from a Playlist

To remove music files from a playlist:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Music

2. Tap the

Playlists

tab.

3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.

4. Press ➔

Remove

5. Tap the checkbox to the left of each track you want to

remove from this playlist, or tap

Select all

to remove all

the music tracks from this playlist, then tap

Remove

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Multimedia 90

Editing a Playlist

Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you

can also rename the playlist.

To edit a playlist:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Music

2. Tap

Playlists

3. Press ➔

Edit title

4. Tap a playlist name to edit.

5. Enter a new name for the playlist then tap

For information on downloading music for your phone, see

“Google Play Music” on page 90.

Google Play Music

With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have

added to your music file as well as any music you copied

from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have

copied from your PC.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Play Music

All music on your device and external SD card is

displayed including Music folders that may contain

multiple songs.

2. Tap a song to start playback.

3. From the main Play Music screen, you can tap any of

the following tabs for a more detailed listing of songs:

Playlists, Recent, Artists, Albums, Songs, and Genres.

4. Tap for the following options:

•Shuffle all

: allows you to play all of your music in a shuffled

order.

•Settings

: allows you to view Open source licenses and the

music version for the Play Music application.

•Help

: allows you to view a help file on the Google Support

website.

Mobile TV

Mobile TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch

your favorite TV shows using your handset.

Note:

This feature requires a paid subscription. See your AT&T

Customer Service Representative for more information.

1. Tap ➔

Mobile TV

Note:

The first time you use Mobile TV, you will need to

download the application from the Play Store. For more

information, refer to “Play Store” on page 194.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

2. The Play Store displays the

Mobile TV

application. Tap

Update

3. Tap

Accept & download

4. Tap

Open

5. Read the

Terms and Conditions

and tap

Accept & Start

Trial

to continue or

Exit

to exit.

6. The Mobile TV main page displays. Follow the on-

screen instructions to watch TV.

Note:

Mobile TV will use a large amount of data and you are

responsible for all data charges. It is strongly

recommended that you upgrade to a large data plan in

addition to this purchase.

Video

The Video application plays video files stored on your phone

or microSD card.

1. Tap ➔

Video

All videos that you have on your phone and memory

card will be displayed.

2. Tap the video that you want to play.

The video will begin to play.

3. The following video controls are available:

Pause the video.

Start the video after being paused.

Press and hold to rewind the video. Tap to

go to previous video.

Press and hold to fast-forward the video.

Tap to go to next video.

Volume control.

PIP (Picture In Picture) view. T

he video will

be played in a small window so you can use

your phone for other purposes while watching

the video. Double-tap screen to return to

previous size.

Original size view. T

he video will be played in

its original size.

Full-screen in ratio view. T

he video is

enlarged as much as possible without

becoming distorted.

Full-screen view. T

he entire screen is used,

which may cause some minor distortion.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Multimedia 92

Note:

The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon

that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the

icon is tapped.

For more information on downloading videos for your phone,

see “Samsung Hub” on page 81.

Play Movies & TV

With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of

different movies and television shows. You can watch

instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing

at a later time.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Play Movies & TV

2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already

done so.

3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and

viewing movies and TV shows.

4. Tap the

MOVIES

tab to view movies you can rent.

5. Tap the

TV SHOWS

tab to view shows you can rent.

6. Tap the

PERSONAL VIDEOS

tab to view movies you have

on your phone or memory card.

7. Press for additional options.

Gallery

The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.

For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a

slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and

share as a picture message.

1. Tap ➔

Gallery

All of the Albums that hold your pictures and videos will

be displayed with folder name and number of files.

2. Tap an Album and thumbnails of the contents will be

displayed.

Note:

If your device displays that the memory is full when you

access Gallery, delete some of the files by using

My Files

or other file management applications and try again. For

more information, refer to “My Files” on page 190.

Streams the video to another device via

Samsung Link.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Viewing Pictures

1. From the main gallery, press ➔

Slideshow

to see a

slideshow of all of your pictures.

2. Tap a thumbnail to view a single picture.

Note:

If no control icons are displayed on the screen in

addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to

display them.

3. The following options are available at the top of the

screen:

•Share via

: allows you to share the picture via Bluetooth,

ChatON, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Group Play, Messaging,

Picasa, S Memo, Send single image, or Wi-Fi Direct.

• Delete

: allows you to delete the picture.

•Camera

: activates the camera.

4. Press for additional options.

Viewing Videos

Note:

If no control icons are displayed on the screen in

addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to

display them.

1. Tap a video to select it.

2. Tap to play the video.

3. Press for additional options.

For video player controls, see “Video” on page 91.

Using S Beam to Share Pictures

This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam

large files directly to another compatible device that is in

direct contact. These files can be larger, such as Videos, HD

pictures, and other large files.You can beam images and

videos from your gallery, music files from your Music, and

more.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

2. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide

the

NFC

slider to the right to turn it on .

3. Tap

S Beam

and make sure the feature is turned on.

4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide

the

S Beam

slider to the right to turn it on .

5. On the source device (containing the desired image or

video), tap ➔

Gallery

6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the

preview window.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Multimedia 94

Important!

Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying

the Lock screen. They must both be active and

unlocked. It is recommended that the target device

be on the Home screen.

7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back

to begin (1).

Note:

If the

Touch to beam

screen does not appear on the

source device:

- Pull them apart

- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on

the source device (providing the file)

- Place them together again

8. From the

Touch to beam

screen, tap the reduced image

preview to begin the transfer (2).

9. When prompted, separate the two devices. After a few

seconds (depending on file size) the recipient with then

see the transferred file displayed on their screen.

To share multiple pictures via S Beam:

1. On the source device (containing the desired image or

video), tap ➔

Gallery

2. Locate the selected folder.

3. Touch and hold the first image and place a checkmark

on it and all desired images.

4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back

to begin.

Touch to beam

Place devices back to back

Tap the source image

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

5. From the

Touch to beam

screen, tap the reduced image

preview to begin the transfer.

6. When prompted, separate the two devices.

7. The picture(s) is transferred to the other device.

Camera

This section explains how to use the camera on your phone.

You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-

in camera functionality. Your 8 megapixel camera produces

photos in JPEG format.

Important!

Do not take photos of people without their

permission.

Do not take photos in places where cameras are

not allowed.

Do not take photos in places where you may

interfere with another person’s privacy.

Using the Camera

Taking Photos

Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as

simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then

pressing the camera key.

Note:

When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright

conditions, shadows may appear on the photo.

1. From the main Home screen, tap ➔

Camera

to activate the camera mode.

2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,

adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.

3. Before you take a picture, use the

and

Down

Volume

keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up

to x4 (400 percent).

– or –

Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to

zoom in.

4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap

on-screen icons to access various camera options and

settings.

5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to the

area you touch.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Multimedia 96

6. Press the Camera key ( ) until the shutter sounds.

(The picture is automatically stored within your

designated storage location. If no microSD is installed,

all pictures are stored on the Phone.)

7. While viewing a picture, after you have taken it, pinch

the screen outwards to zoom in or pinch the screen

inwards to zoom out.

You can magnify the picture up to x4.

8. Press to return to the viewfinder.

Taking Dual Camera Photos

With the Dual Camera feature, you can take a picture with

both the front and rear cameras at the same time.

To take a Dual Camera picture:

1. From the camera viewfinder, tap the Dual Camera icon

located at the top left side of the screen.

The camera viewfinder displays an image from the

front-facing camera within a postage stamp picture

frame on top of the main image displayed from the

rear-facing camera.

2. Press the Camera key ( ) to take the picture.

To resize the front camera image:



Touch and hold the postage stamp picture frame until

the resize handles appear, then drag a corner to

enlarge the image.

To reposition the front camera image



Touch and hold the postage stamp picture frame to

detach it and then move it to a desired location.

Viewfinder

Camera

Image

Viewer

Mode

Effects

Battery

Charge

Change

Mode

Quick Settings

Front

(Gallery)

Video

Record

Take

Picture

Facing

Camera

Dual Camera

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Camera Modes

There are many different camera modes that you can use to

help optimize your photos depending on the conditions and

your experience.

1. From the camera viewfinder, tap the Mode button

to change the mode to one of the following:

–

Auto

: Automatically adjusts your camera to optimize color and

brightness. This is the default setting

–

Beauty face

: Use this to take photos with lightened faces for

gentler images.

–

Best photo

: Use this to take multiple photos in a short time,

and then choose the best photos among them. Press the

Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens, tap

and hold thumbnails of photos to save, and then tap Done.

–

Best face

: Use this to take multiple group shots at the same

time and combine them to create the best possible image. Press

the Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens,

tap the yellow frame on each face, and choose the best

individual face for the subject. After choosing a pose for each

individual, tap Done to merge the images into a single photo,

and tap Save.

–

Sound & shot

: Use this mode to enrich pictures by adding

background sounds for a few seconds. The background sound

is recorded for up to 9 seconds after taking the photo.

–

Drama

: Use this to take a series of photos of a moving object

and then merge them together into one image.

–

Animated photo

: Use this to create a picture in which a few

selected static objects move by animating objects detected by

the device.

–

Rich tone (HDR)

: Use this to take photos with richer colors and

contrasts.

–

Eraser

: Saves the best of 5 taken pictures and removes any

passers by.

–

Panorama

: Use this to take wide panoramic photos. Press the

Shutter button to take a photo, and then move the camera in

any direction. When the blue frame aligns with the preview

screen, the camera automatically takes another shot in the

panoramic sequence. To stop shooting, press the Shutter button

again.

–

Sports

: Use this to take fast action photos.

MODE

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Multimedia 98

–

Night:

Use this to take photos in low-light conditions, without

using the flash. Press the Shutter button to take multiple photos.

Photos are automatically merged into a single photo.

Quick Settings

Tap at the top of the display to quickly change Camera

settings. Not all of the following options are available in both

still camera and video camera modes. The available options

vary by mode.

Camera and Camcorder Settings

This section describes the different settings that you can

configure on your camera. Not all of the following options are

available in both still camera and video camera modes. The

available options vary by mode.

1. From the viewfinder, tap (

Quick Settings

) ➔

(

Camera Settings

2. The follow settings are located under the Camera,

Camcorder, Share, and General tabs. The settings that

are displayed will depend on what camera mode you

are in.

Camera

•Photo size

: Select a resolution for photos. Use higher

resolution for higher quality. Higher resolution photos take up

more memory.

•Burst shot

: allows several photographs to be captured in quick

succession by touching and holding the Camera button.

• Face detection

: allows you to adjust the camera focus based

on face detection technology.

Configure Camera settings.

Activate or deactivate the flash.

Use this to activate or deactivate night detection.

Activate or deactivate the voice control to take photos.

Select a resolution for videos.

Activate or deactivate the sharing options.

Hide Quick settings.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

• Metering

: allows you to set how the camera measures or

meters the light source: Center-weighted, Matrix, or Spot.

•ISO

: determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital

camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400, or 800. Use a

lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light, a

higher ISO number to take photos with less light, or Auto to let

the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.

•Anti-Shake

: compensates for camera movement.

• Auto night detection

: activates or deactivates the night

detection feature.

•Save as

: allows you to assign rich tone usage to an image.

Camcorder

•Movie size

: Select a resolution for videos. Use higher resolution

for higher quality. Higher resolution videos take up more

memory.

• Video stabilization

: Activate or deactivate Optical Image

Stabilization.

Settings

• GPS tag

: attach a GPS location tag to the photo. To improve

GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may

be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas,

or in poor weather conditions. Your location may appear on

your photos when you upload them to the Internet. To avoid

this, deactivate the GPS tag setting.

•Review

: set this option if you want to view each picture after

you take it. Select a time value.

•Volume key

: assigns a function to the volume key. Choose

from The zoom key, The camera key, or The record key.

•Timer

: Use this for delayed-time shots. You can set the timer to

Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, or 10 sec.

• White balance

: Select an appropriate white balance, so

images have a true-to-life colour range. The settings are

designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are

similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in

professional cameras.

•Exposure value

: allows you to adjust the brightness level by

moving the slider.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Multimedia 100

• Guidelines

: Display viewfinder guides to help composition

when selecting subjects.

•Flash

: activate or deactivate the flash.

• Voice control

: activates/deactivates voice control feature that

allows you to verbally take a photo.

• Contextual filename

: allows you to have your location added

as part of the filename. You must first activate GPS tag

described above.

•Save as flipped

: when set to On, this option allows you to take

and save a mirror-image video when using self-recording

mode.

•Storage

: Select the memory location for storage.

•Shutter sound

: Turn the shutter sound on or off.

• Reset

: Reset the camera settings.

Viewing your Pictures

After you take a photo, you can access various options from

the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery. For

more information, refer to “Gallery” on page 92.

Editing a Photo

You can edit your photos using the built-in Photo editor

application on your device. The photo editor application

provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on

your phone. Along with basic image tuning like brightness,

contrast, and color it also provides a wide variety of effects

used for editing the picture.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Gallery

2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.

3. With the image displayed, press ➔

Edit

to launch

the Photo editor.

Note:

To select the picture area, touch and hold the current

picture.

4. Select an image area by touching and holding the

image and then selecting an available option:

• Selection mode

: provides several on-screen selection options

such as: Select area, Inverse selection, Selection size, and

Selection mode (Magnetic, Lasso, Brush, Round, and Square).

• Select all

: select the entire area of the current image.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

101

•Clipboard

: copies the currently selected area to your device’s

clipboard.

5. Use the following editor controls to edit your picture:

6. Press to access the following options:

• Save as

: allows you to rename your current image and save it

to your gallery.

•Select image

: allows you to select a new image for editing.

• Take picture

: allows you to activate the camera and take a

new image for editing.

•Share via

: allows you to share your saved photo via AT&T

Locker, Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google+,

Group Play, Messaging, Picasa, S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.

•Set as

: assigns the currently saved image as either a: Contact

photo, Home and lock screens, Home screen, or Lock screen.

: move to previous photo project.

: move to next photo project.

Rotate

: allows you to rotate a photo in all 4

directions. You can also mirror image a photo.

Crop

: allows you to crop (cut-out) an area of a

photo.

Color

: allows you to Auto adjust color, Brightness,

Contrast, Saturation, Adjust RGB, Temperature,

Exposure, and Hue of a photo.

Effects

: allows you to add various effects to your

photo.

Portrait

: allows you to apply various face

correction effects such as: Red-eye fix, Airbrush

face, Face brightness, Out-of-focus, Beauty face,

Funny face, or Spot healing.

Sticker

: allows you to place various pre-created

on-screen stickers atop your current image.

Drawing

: allows you to add draw directly on your

current picture by using either a brush/pen or

eraser.

Frame

: places a pre-created border style atop

your current image.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Multimedia 102

Using the Camcorder

In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a

camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send

videos.

Note:

The camera may not be able to properly record videos to

a memory card with a slow transfer speed.

Shooting Video

Tip:

When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright

conditions, it is recommended that you provide your

subject with sufficient light by having the light source

behind you.

1. From the main Home screen, tap

Camera

activate the camera mode.

2. Using the camera’s main display screen as a

viewfinder, adjust the image by aiming the camcorder

at the subject.

3. Before you take a video, use the Volume control

buttons to zoom in or out. You can magnify the video up

to x4 (400 percent).

4. Tap the Video key ( ) to begin shooting video. The

red light will blink while recording.

5. You can tap the screen to move the focus to the area

you touch.

6. target area.

7. To capture an image from the video while recording,

tap . This feature is not available while the

anti-shake feature is activated.

8. Tap the Pause key ( ) to stop the recording and

save the video file to your Camera folder.

9. Tap the Stop key ( ) to stop the recording and save

the video file to your Camera folder.

10. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer,

then tap to play your video.

11. Press to return to the viewer.

Viewing your Videos

After you take a video, you can access various options from

the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery and

the Video player. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on

page 92. Also, see“Video” on page 91.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

103

Section 7: Messaging

This section describes how to send and receive different

types of messages. It also includes the features and

functionality associated with messaging.

Types of Messages

Your phone provides the following message types:

•

Text Messages

•

Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages

•

Email and Gmail Messages

•

Google Talk

•

ChatON

The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive

text messages to and from other mobile phones or email

addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to

your service provider’s message service.

The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and

receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and

audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email

addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to

your service provider’s multimedia message service.

Important!

When creating a message, adding an image, a

sound file, or a video clip to a text message

changes the message from a text message to a

multimedia message.

Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and

indicate when messages are received and their type. For

more information, refer to “Indicator Icons” on page 20.

Creating and Sending Messages

1. From the main Home screen, tap

Messaging

➔

Compose

Note:

The main Home screen initially contains the

Messaging

icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access

Messaging from another Home screen, you must tap

Apps

➔

Messaging

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Messaging 104

2. Tap on the

Enter recipient

field to manually enter a

recipient or tap to select a recipient from your

Contacts. You can also select the recipient based on

Groups, Favorites, or Logs.

3. If adding a recipient from your Contacts, tap the

contact to place a checkmark then tap

Done

The contact will be placed in the recipient field.

Note:

For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less

than 10, all members in the group will be added. You will

need to delete any unnecessary members in the list by

selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted

entries.

Note:

Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with

a semicolon (;) then using the previous procedure.

4. Tap the

Enter message

field and use the on-screen

keypad to enter a message. For more information, refer

to “Entering Text” on page 62.

5. Add more recipients by tapping the recipient field.

6. Review your message and tap

Send

Note:

If you exit a message before you send it, it will be

automatically saved as a draft.

Message Options

Options before composing a message

1. From the main Home screen, tap

Messaging

2. Before composing a message, press to reveal

additional messaging options:

•Search

: allows you to search through all of your messages for

a certain word or string of words. Enter a search string in the

Messaging Search window and tap .

• Delete threads

: allows you to delete any message thread.

Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will

appear next to the message. Tap

Delete

• Draft messages

: displays the draft messages folder and its

contents.

• Locked messages

: displays the locked messages folder and

its contents.

• Scheduled messages

: displays the scheduled messages

folder and its contents.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

105

• Spam messages

: displays the spam messages folder and its

contents.

• Settings

: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more

information, refer to

“Messaging Settings”

on page 108.

Options while composing a message

1. While composing a message, press to reveal

additional messaging options.

• Insert smiley

: allows you to add emoticons, such as a happy

face to your message.

•Add text

: allows you to copy text from your contacts, calendar,

or from a memo to add to your message. This is a convenient

feature for adding names, phone numbers, events, etc. to your

message.

For more information, refer to “Adding

Additional Text”

on page 106.

• Add to Contacts

: allows you to add the recipient to your

Contacts list. This option only appears if the recipient is not

already in your Contacts list.

•View contact

: allows you to see information on the recipient.

This option only appears if the recipient is in your Contacts list.

• Add slide

: allows you to add a new page to a message.

• Add recipients

: allows you to add additional recipients.

• Delete message

: allows you to delete the message.

• Scheduled message

: allows you to assign the current

message for scheduled delivery at a designated time.

• Add to spam numbers

: allows you to tag a number as spam

so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam

folder.

• Remove from spam numbers

allows you to unregister a

number from the spam number list. This option only appears if

the number was previously registered as spam.

•Discard

: allows you to delete the current message.

•Translate

: launches a Translate popup menu. Here you can

both assign the sender’s original language and assign a target

language for the recipient (they will receive your message in the

designated language). Other options include, Check Incoming

messages only, and Include original text in outgoing message.

Tap to create a checkmark.

Adding attachments to a message

To add an attachment to your message, tap and select

one of the following options:

•

Images

: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures

list to add it to your message.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Messaging 106

•

Take a picture

: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take

a photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by

tapping

Save

•

Video

: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,

then add it to your message

•

Record video

: allows you to temporarily exit the message,

record a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it

to your message by tapping

Save

•

Audio

: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the

Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to

the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping

Done

•

Record audio

: allows you to temporarily exit the message and

record an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then

automatically attached to the message.

•

S Memo

: allows you to add an S Memo that you have created.

•

Calendar

: allows you to add an event from your calendar. Select

the desired event and tap

Done

•

Location

: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing

your location.

•

Contacts

: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry,

then add it to your message by tapping

Done

Adding Additional Text

You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and

events from your Contacts, Calendar or a Memo.

1. While composing a message, press ➔

Add text

2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:

•S Note

: allows you to insert text from an existing S Note.

•Calendar

: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a

calendar event to your message.

•Location

: allows you to add an address and the link to the

location on Google Maps.

•Contacts

: allows you to add the name and phone number of

any of your contacts to your message.

• Text templates

: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and

sentences.

The information is added to your message.

Viewing New Received Messages

1. When you receive a new message, the new message

icon will appear at the top of your screen.

2. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For

more information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page

46.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

107

– or –

From the main Home screen, tap

Messaging

then

tap the new message to view it.

The selected message appears in the display.

3. To play a multimedia message, tap .

•

To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap

4. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages

have been added), touch the screen and in a single

motion, scroll up or down the page.

Message Threads

Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped

into message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see

all the messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and

displays a contact on the screen. Message threads are listed

in the order in which they were received, with the latest

message displayed at the top.

To access message thread options:



From the main Messaging screen, touch and hold the

message to display the following options:

•View contact

: displays the Contact’s Overview page.

•Add to contact

: begins the process of adding the new number

to your Contacts list.

• Delete thread

: deletes the currently selected message thread.

• Add to spam numbers

: adds the current sender to a spam list.

ny new texts from this sender are automatically blocked.

To access additional Bubble options:



Touch and hold the message bubble within an active

message conversation to display the following options:

• Delete message

: deletes any currently selected message

bubble from the thread.

• Copy message text

: copies the currently selected message

bubble from the thread.

• Lock/Unlock message

: locks or unlocks the currently selected

message bubble from being accidentally deleted.

•Forward

: allows you to forward the currently selected message

bubble to an external recipient.

•Copy to SIM

: copies the currently selected message bubble as

a single text message within the SIM card.

• View message details

: displays details for the currently

selected message bubble.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Messaging 108

•Translate

: translates the text from the currently selected

bubble into a desired language.

Deleting Messages

Deleting a single message thread

1. From the main Home screen, tap

Messaging

2. Touch and hold a message, then tap

Delete thread

3. At the

Delete

prompt, tap

to delete or

Cancel

cancel.

Deleting multiple message threads

1. From the main Home screen, tap

Messaging

2. Press ➔

Delete threads

3. Tap each message you want to delete. A checkmark

will appear beside each message you select.

4. Tap

Delete

5. At the

Delete

prompt, tap

to delete or

Cancel

cancel.

Message Search

You can search through your messages by using the

Message Search feature.

1. From the main Home screen, tap

Messaging

2. Tap ➔

3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase to

search for, then tap .

4. All messages that contain the search string you

entered are displayed.

Messaging Settings

To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia

messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.

1. From the main Home screen, tap

Messaging

➔

Settings

2. The following Messaging settings are available:

General settings:

• Delete old messages

: deletes old messages when the limit is

reached, rather than having them overwritten.

• Text message limit

: allows you to set a limit on how many text

messages can be in one conversation.

• Multimedia message limit

: allows you to set a limit on how

many multimedia messages can be in one conversation.

• Text templates

: allows you to edit or add new text templates to

use in your messaging.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

109

Text message (SMS) settings:

• Manage SIM card messages

: allows you to manage the

messages that you have stored on your SIM card.

• Message center

: allows you to enter the number of your

Message center where your messages reside while the system

is attempting to deliver them.

• Input mode

: allows you to set the input mode for your text

messages. Choose between GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or

Automatic.

Multimedia message (MMS) settings:

• Group messaging

: allows you to send a single message to

multiple recipients.

•Auto-retrieve

: allows the message system to retrieve

messages automatically.

•Creation mode

: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,

Restricted, or Warning.

–

Restricted

: you can only create and submit messages with

content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.

–

Warning

: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that

you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the

Core MM Content Domain.

–

Free

: you may add any content to the message.

•MMS alert

: allows you to receive an alert when MMS mode

becomes active.

Display:

• Bubble style

: allows you to choose from several bubble styles

for your messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that

surround each message.

• Background style

: allows you to choose from several

background styles for your messages.

• Use the volume key

: allows you to change the text size by

using the up or down volume keys.

Push message settings:

• Push messages

: allows you to receive push messages from

the network.

Cell Broadcast (CB) settings:

• CB activation

: allows you to receive Cell Broadcast (CB)

messages.

• Channel configuration

: allows you to set up the channel that

you will receive CB messages on.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Messaging 110

Notifications settings:

• Notifications

: allows you to see message notifications on your

status bar.

• Select ringtone

: allows you to set the ringtone for your

message notifications.

•Vibrate

: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated

with message alerts.

• Message alert repetition

: allows you to set the interval for new

message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or Every

10 minutes.

• Preview message

: when enabled, allows you to view a

preview of new message text on the Status bar.

Emergency message settings:

•Emergency alerts

: allows you to receive wireless emergency

alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS).

For more information, refer to

“Emergency Alerts”

on page

111.

• Emergency notification review

: allows you to play the

emergency alert tone so you will know what to expect when an

alert is received.

• Alert reminder

: allows you to set reminders after you receive

an alert. You can select Once, Every 2 minutes, Every 15

minutes, or Off (default).

Signature settings:

• Add signature

: when enabled, this feature allows you to create

a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.

•Signature text

: allows you to enter a desired signature for your

message.

Spam message settings:

• Spam settings

: when enabled, allows you to configure

available spam settings such as:

• Add to spam numbers

: allows you to manually enter and

assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source.

• Add to spam phrases

: allows you to assign a specific text

phrase as belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.

• Block unknown senders

: when active, automatically blocks

incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

111

Emergency Alerts

This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts

from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) which

may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting

Network (PLAN). If your wireless provider has chosen to

participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the

provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's

coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be

available. For more information, please contact your wireless

provider.

Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive

geographically-targeted messages. Alert messages are

provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and

will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within

their area. There is no charge for receiving an Emergency

Alert message.

There are three types of Emergency Alerts:

•

Alerts issued by the President

•

Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life (Extreme and

Severe)

•

AMBER Alerts (missing child alert)

Customers may choose not to receive Imminent Threats

(Extreme and Severe) and AMBER Alerts. Alerts issued by the

President can not be disabled. To disable Imminent Threats

and AMBER Alerts, follow the instructions below:

1. From the main Home screen, tap

Messaging

2. Press ➔

Settings

3. Scroll to the bottom and tap

Emergency alerts

4. All alerts are enabled by default (checkmark showing).

Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove

the checkmark.

Using Email

Email enables you to review and create email using various

email services. You can also receive text message alerts

when you receive an important email.

Creating an Email Account

1. From the Home screen, tap

Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup

screen displayed.

2. Enter you email address in the

address

field.

3. Enter your password in the

Password

field.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Messaging 112

4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,

tap

Show password

to create a checkmark.

5. Tap

6. At the

Account options

screen, tap any of the options

you would like.

7. Tap

8. Enter a name for this email account (optional).

9. Tap

Done

Creating a Corporate Email Account

Use the following procedure to configure your phone to

synchronize with a corporate email account.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup

screen displayed.

2. Enter you email address in the

address

field.

3. Enter your password in the

Password

field.

4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,

tap

Show password

to create a checkmark.

5. If you want all of your emails sent from this email

account by default, tap the checkbox to create a

checkmark. This checkbox only appears if you have

previously set up an email account.

6. Tap

Manual setup

7. Tap the

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync

field.

8. Enter all the Exchange server information, Domain,

User name and Password, then tap

9. At the

Activation

prompt, tap

The

Account options

screen is displayed.

10. Enter the desired information in the different fields,

then tap

11. Enter an Account name for this account (Optional) and

tap

Done

Wait for the Inbox to synchronize before use.

12. Press ➔

Settings

to change the account settings.

Creating Additional Email Accounts

To create additional email accounts after setting up your first

account, follow these steps:

1. From the Home screen, tap

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

113

Your Email screen displays showing your emails from

the active account.

2. Press ➔

Settings

3. Tap

Add account

to add another email account.

4. Enter the information required to set up another

account. For more information, refer to “Creating an

Email Account” on page 111.

Switching Between Email Accounts

1. From the Home screen, tap

Your Email screen displays showing your emails from

the active account.

2. Tap the Inbox button at the top of your screen.

Your Email accounts screen is displayed.

3. Tap the Email account

Inbox

you would like to switch

to. You can also select

Combined inbox

which will

display email messages from all accounts.

4. The new Email account is displayed.

Using Gmail

Gmail is Google’s web-based email. When you first setup the

phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the

synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized

with your Gmail account.

Signing into Your Gmail

Note:

You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to

access Gmail.

1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already

signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a

New Google Account” on page 14.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Gmail

3. Follow the on-screen instructions.

The Inbox loads conversations and email.

Creating a Gmail Message

1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap at the bottom of the

screen to create a new message.

2. Enter the recipients Email address in the

field.

Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a

comma.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Messaging 114

3. Tap and select

Add Cc/Bcc

to add a carbon or blind

copy.

4. Enter the subject of this message in the

Subject

field.

5. Tap the

Compose email

field and begin composing your

message.

6. Tap to send.

Viewing a Gmail Message

1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view it.

2. The following options are available at the bottom of the

screen after a message has been selected:

•Archive

: archives the selected message.

• Delete

: deletes the message.

•Labels

: allows you to attach labels to a message. This is

similar to putting it in a folder.

• Mark Unread

: after reading a message, marks as unread.

• Newer

: swipe your screen to the right to see newer messages.

•Older

: swipe your screen to the left to see older messages.

3. Press to select one of the following additional

options:

• Mark important/not important

: allows you to set the

importance of a message.

•Mute

: allows you to mute the sound in a message if applicable.

•Report spam

: allows you to report a message as spam. Tap

the UNDO option if you change your mind.

• Report phishing

: allows you to report a message that you feel

is trying to improperly get information from you.

•Settings

: displays Email settings that you can modify.

• Send feedback

: allows you to send feedback or report a

problem.

•Help

: displays the Google.com webpage so you can search the

web for help.

Other Gmail Options

1. Tap at the bottom of the screen to refresh the

screen, send and receive new emails, and synchronize

your email with the Gmail account.

2. Tap at the bottom of the screen to set up and

manage Labels for your Gmail messages.

3. Tap at the bottom of the screen to search through

your Gmail messages.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

115

Google Talk

Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for

instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are

automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.

This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your

Gmail accounts.

1. Log on to your Google account if you have not already

done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a

New Google Account” on page 14.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Talk

3. Begin using Google Talk.

4. Press ➔

Help

for more information on using

Google Talk.

Note:

The Network confirms your login and processes. This

could take up to 5 minutes to complete.

Google +

Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a

lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream

to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast

messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant

Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your

own private album on Google+.

1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,

refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 14.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Google+

3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to

Google+.

– or –

Tap

Add account

to create another account.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.

5. Visit

www.google.com/mobile/+/

for more information.

Messenger

Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into

a simple group conversation. When you get a new

conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your

phone.

1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,

refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 14.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Messenger

– or –

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Messaging 116

From the Google+ application, select

Messenger

3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to

Google+ and tap

– or –

Tap

Add account

to create another account.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to add or follow

people.

5. Tap

at the bottom of the screen.

6. At the

Messenger

screen, tap to start a new

message.

7. In the upper text field, enter a name, email address, or

circle.

8. In the bottom message field, enter a message then tap

9. From the

Messenger

screen, tap

Learn more

for more

detailed information.

Messages App

AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail

messages together into a single conversation thread and is

accessible by phone or computer.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Messages

2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already

signed on. For more information, refer to “Creating a

New Google Account” on page 14.

Note:

The first time you use the Messages app, you will need

to download the updated application from the Play

Store. When the Play Store page displays, tap

Update

For more information, refer to “Play Store” on page

194.

3. At the Welcome screen, read the information and tap

Continue

or tap

Learn More

to receive more

information.

4. The first time you use Messages, you will need to set

up a few things. Tap

Record Greeting

to record a

personal greeting, or tap

Skip

if you want to do it later.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

117

5. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the Messages

app.

ChatON

Provides a global mobile communication service where you

can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat. Share

things such as pictures, videos, animation messages

(Scribbles), audio, Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location

information.

For more information, visit:

https://web.samsungchaton.com

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

ChatON

2. At the ChatON display, tap

to sign in to your

Samsung account if you have not already done so. For

more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung

Account” on page 14.

– or –

Tap

Skip

if you have already signed in to your Samsung

account.

3. Enter your real name and tap

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a buddy and

begin your chat session.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 118

Section 8: Changing Your Settings

This section explains the settings used for customizing your

device.

Accessing Settings

1. From any Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

– or –

From any Home screen, press ➔

Settings

Settings Tabs

The Settings are divided into 4 main groups. When the

Settings screen displays, the following 4 tabs are located at

the top of the screen:

Connections

This tab allows you to see all of settings related to

the connection of your device to external sources.

Features include: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Data usage,

More networks (Airplane mode, Mobile networks,

Tethering and portable hotspot, and VPN), NFC,

S Beam, Nearby devices, Screen Mirroring, and

Kies via Wi-Fi.

My device

This tab provides access to device configuration

and customization features. Features include:

Lock screen, Display, LED indicator, Sound, Home

screen mode, Call, Blocking mode, Power saving

mode, Accessory, Accessibility, Language and

input, Motions and gestures, Smart screen, Air

view, and Voice control.

Accounts

This tab provides both the ability to create and

modify your accounts (example; Samsung account,

Email, Google account, etc.) and access Backup and

reset features.

This tab provides access to the remaining set of

device settings not listed under the other three tabs.

These include Location services, Security,

Application manager, Battery, Storage, Date and

time, and About device.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

119

Note:

The settings for your device are described below in the

order that they appear within the Settings menu. Options

under the Connections tab are listed first, followed by

My device, Accounts, and More settings.

Wi-Fi Settings

This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For information on

how to use Wi-Fi, see “Wi-Fi” on page 169.

Activating Wi-Fi

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Wi-Fi

2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi

field, to turn Wi-Fi ON .

3. Tap

Scan

to scan for available Wi-Fi networks. For more

information, refer to “Connect to a Wi-Fi Network” on

page 170.

Activating Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can

transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Wi-Fi

2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi

Direct field, to turn Wi-Fi Direct ON .

3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the

Wi-Fi Direct

button.

For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Direct” on page

172.

Advanced Wi-Fi Settings

The advanced Wi-Fi settings allow you to set up and manage

wireless access points.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Wi-Fi

2. Press ➔

Advanced

The following options are available:

• Network notification

: alerts you when a new WAP is available.

• Passpoint

: allows you to connect to passpoint-enabled Wi-Fi

Access Points automatically. Touch and slide the slider to the

right to turn it on .

• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep

: allows you to specify when to

disconnect from Wi-Fi.

• Check for Internet service

: Checks if Wi-Fi internet service is

available when connected to an AP (Access Point).

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 120

•Auto connect

: allows you to be automatically connected to an

AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.

•MAC address

: view your device’s MAC address, required

when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).

•IP address

: view your device’s IP address.

Bluetooth settings

In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a

device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices

can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices

with which to pair.

Activating Bluetooth

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the

Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON .

The Bluetooth icon is displayed on the status bar.

Additional Bluetooth Settings

When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Bluetooth

2. Tap

Scan

to scan for nearby discoverable devices. After

searching, tap a device to pair with it. For more

information, refer to “Pairing Bluetooth Devices” on

page 175.

3. Press and select a Bluetooth setting to configure:

• Visibility timeout

: Use this setting to control when to

automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5

minutes, 1 hour, or Never time out.

• Received files

: Shows the list of files received by using

Bluetooth.

• Help

: Provides additional information on Bluetooth and

Bluetooth settings.

4. Tap the checkbox next to

SAMSUNG-SGH-I527

if you do

not want your phone visible to other Bluetooth devices.

Data Usage

From this screen you can view your Mobile data usage and

turn your Mobile data capability On or Off.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Data usage

2. Tap

Mobile data

to create a checkmark and turn Mobile

data usage on.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

121

3. Tap

Set mobile data limit

to create a checkmark and

allow a data limit to be set.

4. Touch and drag the red limit bar to the GB limit that you

desire.

5. Tap the

Data usage cycle

drop-down menu and select a

date.

The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also

displays a list of each application with a breakdown of

how much data was used per application.

Note:

Data is measured by your device. Your service provider

may account for data usage differently.

6. Press to display additional options. Tap to activate.

• Data roaming

: enables data roaming on your device.

• Restrict background data

: restricts some apps and services

from working unless you are connected to a Wi-Fi network.

• Auto-sync data

: allows your accounts to automatically sync

•Show Wi-Fi usage

: displays a Wi-Fi tab that shows Wi-Fi

usage.

• Mobile hotspots

: displays available mobile hotspots.

More networks

This option displays additional Connectivity information.



From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

More networks

Options display for Airplane mode, Mobile networks,

Tethering and portable hotspots, and VPN.

Airplane mode

Airplane mode allows you to use many of your phone’s

features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are

in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving

calls or data is prohibited.

Important!

When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot

send or receive any calls or access online

information or applications.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

More networks

2. Tap the Airplane mode checkbox to create a

checkmark and activate the feature.

3. At the

Enable airplane mode

prompt, tap

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 122

The Airplane mode icon is displayed at the top of

your screen.

Mobile networks

Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find

your location or search for places of interest, you must

enable the Mobile networks options.

Mobile data

To enable data access over the mobile network, this option

must be selected. It is set on by default.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

More networks

➔

Mobile networks

2. Tap

Mobile data

to create a checkmark and activate the

feature.

Data Roaming

Data roaming allows you to connect to your service

provider’s partner networks and access data services when

you are out of your service providers area of coverage.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

More networks

➔

Mobile networks

2. Tap

Data roaming

to create a checkmark and activate

the feature.

Access Point Names

To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point

(hotspot).

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

More networks

➔

Mobile networks

2. Tap

Access Point Names

A list of the Access Point names display. The active

access point displays a green, filled circle to the right

of the name.

Network Operators

Using this feature you can view the current network

connection. You can also scan and select a network operator

manually, or set the network selection to Automatic.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

More networks

➔

Mobile networks

2. Tap

Network operators

The current network connection displays at the bottom

of the list.

Important!

You must deactivate data service prior to searching

for an available network.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

123

Note:

Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer

speed and time.

Default setup options

Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically

search for an available network. You can set this option to

Manual to select a network each time you connect.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

More networks

➔

Mobile networks

2. Tap

Network operators

3. Tap

Default setup

4. Tap

Manual

to locate and connect to a network

manually, or tap

Automatic

to allow the device to

automatically select a network.

Tethering & portable hotspot

This option allows you to share your phones’s mobile data

connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.

USB tethering

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

More networks

➔

Tethering and

portable hotspot

2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable.

3. Tap

USB tethering

to add a checkmark and activate the

feature. The USB tethering icon is displayed at the

top of your screen.

Mobile Hotspot

Note:

To enable Mobile Hotspot on your phone, dial 611 or go

att.com/mywireless

to set up the service.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Mobile Hotspot

– or –

From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

More networks

➔

Tethering and

portable hotspots

➔

Mobile Hotspot

2. Turn Mobile Hotspot on by tapping the slider so that it

changes to the ON position .

The Mobile Hotspot icon is displayed at the top of

your screen.

3. Tap

Configure

at the bottom of the screen.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 124

4. Enter or edit the Network SSID, Hide my device,

Security setting, and Password.

5. Tap

Show password

and

Show advanced options

to see

them displayed.

6. Tap

Save

7. Press for the following option:

• Timeout settings

: allows you to set the time your device will be

available as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.

Connecting to Portable Wi-Fi hotspot from other

devices

1. Activate Wi-Fi on the device that wants to connect to

your phone.

2. Find

GALAXY_S4_XXXX

in the Wi-Fi network list and

connect to it. XXXX are four randomly generated digits

that will appear when you set up a Portable Wi-Fi

hotspot on your device.

The connected device can now use internet through

your Portable Wi-Fi hotspot.

Note:

Activating Wi-Fi and connecting to your phone will be

different depending on the type of the other device.

Help



From the

Tethering and portable hotspot

menu, tap

Help

for additional information

VPN settings

The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage

Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).

Important!

Before you can use a VPN you must establish and

configure one.

Adding a Basic VPN

Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN

protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol),

L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-

shared key based L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT

(Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).

1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock

PIN or password. For more information, refer to “Lock

Screen Settings” on page 127.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

More networks

➔

VPN

3. Tap

Basic VPN

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

125

4. Tap

(Add VPN network)

5. Enter a name for the VPN network in the

Name

field.

6. Select a VPN type from the

Type

drop-down menu. The

options are:

•

PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)

•

L2TP/IPSec PSK (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol / Internet Protocol

Security Pre-Shared Key)

•

L2TP/IPSec RSA

•

IPSec Xauth PSK

•

IPSec Xauth RSA

•

IPSec Hybrid RSA

7. Enter the Server address and any other required fields

that are dependent upon the

Type

you entered

previously.

8. Tap the

Show advanced options

check box to display

additional VPN options.

9. Tap

Save

to save your VPN settings.

Adding an IPsec VPN

1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock

PIN or password. For more information, refer to “Lock

Screen Settings” on page 127.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

More networks

➔

VPN

3. Tap

Advanced IPsec VPN

4. Tap

Add VPN connection

5. Enter a password, confirm the password, and tap

6. Enter a name for the VPN connection in the

VPN

connection name

field.

7. Select a IPsec type from the drop-down menu.

8. Enter any other required information.

9. Tap the

Show advanced options

check box to display

additional VPN options.

10. Tap

Save

to save your VPN settings.

NFC

NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when

you touch your device with another compatible device. This

is used for applications such as Android Beam and S Beam.

To activate NFC, follow these steps:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

NFC

2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the NFC

field, to turn NFC ON .

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 126

Android Beam

When Android Beam is activated, you can beam app content

to another NFC-capable device by holding the devices close

together. You can beam browser pages, YouTube videos,

contacts, and more.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

NFC

➔

Android Beam

2. Tap the

OFF / ON

icon to turn Android Beam ON

3. Touch the back of your device with another NFC-

capable device and the content is transferred.

S Beam

When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another

NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.

You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music

files from your Music app, and more.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

S Beam

2. Tap the

OFF / ON

icon to turn S Beam on .

3. Touch the back of your device with another NFC-

capable device and the content is transferred.

Nearby devices

This option allows you to share your media files with nearby

devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi.

1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer

to “Activating Wi-Fi” on page 119.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Nearby devices

3. Tap the

File sharing

checkbox to create a checkmark

and activate File sharing.

4. Verify (

Nearby devices

) appears at the top of the

screen.

5. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap

6. Tap

Shared contents

, then check the media you would

like to share. Tap

7. Tap

Allowed devices list

, then select the connected

devices you would like to allow.

8. Tap

Not-allowed devices list

, then select the connected

devices you would like to not allow.

9. Tap

Download to

, then select the destination of any

downloaded (shared) content. Choose from Device or

SD card.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

127

10. Tap

Upload from other devices

, then select the actions

you’ll take when you upload content from other

devices. Choose from either Always accept, Always

ask, or Always reject.

Screen Mirroring

The Screen Mirroring feature allows you to share the media

files on your device screen with an HDMI device such as an

HDMI TV.

Note:

This feature requires the optional AllShare Cast dongle

which is available as an accessory. See your AT&T

Customer Service Representative for more information.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Screen Mirroring

2. Connect the AllShare Cast dongle to the HDMI device

using an HDMI A-to-A cable.

3. Press ➔

Help

for information on using Screen

Mirroring.

Kies via Wi-Fi

Kies via Wi-Fi allows you to sync your PC wirelessly with your

device provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network.

You can view and share videos, photos, music, ringtones,

and more.

1. From your PC, download the Samsung Kies application

if you don’t already have it. You can find it at

samsung.com

2. From your PC, launch the Samsung Kies application.

3. From your PC, connect to a Wi-Fi network.

4. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Kies via Wi-Fi

5. From your device, connect to the same Wi-Fi network

that your PC is connected to if you have not already

done so. For more information, refer to “Connect to a

Wi-Fi Network” on page 170.

Lock Screen Settings

Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more

information about using the lock and unlock features, see

“Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen” on page 12.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 128

Screen Lock

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Lock screen

2. Tap

Screen lock

for these options then follow the on-

screen instructions to set up your Screen lock:

•Swipe

: Swipe the screen to unlock it.

• Face unlock

: Look at your phone to unlock it.

• Face and voice

: Look at your phone and speak to unlock.

• Pattern

: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create

and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or

change your screen unlock pattern.

•PIN

: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.

•Password

: Create a password for unlocking the screen.

•None

: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will

never lock.

Lock screen options

Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions.

Note:

The Lock screen options will differ depending on what

type of Screen Lock you have selected in step 2.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Lock screen

2. The following options are available depending on the

Screen Lock type that you have selected:

Swipe options

• Multiple widgets

allows you to display multiple widgets on

your lock screen. Appears as an options after a lock mode is

enabled.

• Lock screen widgets

allows you to lock the widgets that are

displayed on your home screens.

•Shortcuts

sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock

screen. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on

• Unlock effect

sets the effect you receive when unlocking the

phone. You can select None, Ripple effect, or Light effect.

• Help text

shows help information on the Lock screen.

• Wake up in lock screen

requires that you say a command to

wake-up your phone.

• Set wake-up command

designates your wake-up

commands. Tap Set wake-up command and follow the on-

screen prompts to create a new verbal command.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

129

Face unlock options

• Lock screen widgets

allows you to lock the widgets that are

displayed on your home screens.

• Improve facial recognition

allows you to improve your

device’s face matching capability by capturing your face in

different lighting, with or without glasses, and bearded or

clean-shaven. Follow the on-screen instructions.

• Presence check

requires that you blink when using the Face

unlock feature. This will increase the security of the feature.

• Secured lock time

allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.

Pattern options

• Lock screen widgets

allows you to lock the widgets that are

displayed on your home screens.

• Make pattern visible

allows you to see the pattern as you

draw it.

• Secured lock time

allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.

PIN and Password options

• Lock screen widgets

allows you to lock the widgets that are

displayed on your home screens.

• Secured lock time

allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.

Display Settings

In this menu, you can change various settings for the display.



From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Display

The following options display:

•Wallpaper

: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home

screen, Lock screen, or both. For more information, refer to

“Changing the Wallpaper” on page 44.

• Notification panel

: allows you to set the brightness of your

notification panel and also select the quick setting buttons that

you want to display at the top of the notification panel. For more

information, refer to

“Notification Bar” on page 46.

•Multi window

: tap this option to enable/disable the automatic

Multi window feature.

• Screen mode

: allows you to select from several different color

modes.

•Brightness

: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap

Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust or drag

the slider and tap OK.

• Auto-rotate screen

: allows you to switch the display

orientation automatically when you rotate the phone.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 130

• Screen timeout

: adjusts the delay time before the screen

automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30

seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes.

•Daydream

: allows you to control what your screen does when

your device is docked or sleeping. Tap the OFF / ON icon next

to Daydream to turn it on . Follow the on-screen

instructions.

• Font style

: allows you to set the font style that your phone will

use. You can also tap Get fonts online to choose from a wider

selection.

•Font size

: allows you to select which size of font is displayed.

• Touch key light duration

: allows you to adjust the delay before

the Touch key light automatically turns off.

• Display battery percentage

: allows you to see the battery

charge percentage next to the battery charge icon at the top of

the display.

• Edit after screen capture

: allows you to go edit a screen

immediately after taking a screen capture.

• Auto adjust screen tone

: allows you to save power because

the phone analyzes the displayed screen image and adjusts the

LCD brightness.

• Auto-adjust touch sensitivity

: allows you to adjust the touch

sensitivity of your phone automatically depending on the type of

material on the display.

LED indicator

This option allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging,

missed events, and incoming notifications. The light will turn

on by default unless you turn them off.



From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

LED indicator

3. Tap the following LED indicator options to turn them on

or off:

•Charging

: LED lights up when the device is connected to the

charger.

•Low battery

: LED lights up when the battery level is low.

• Notifications

: LED lights up when you have missed calls,

messages, or application events.

• Voice recording

: LED lights up when you are recording voice.

The LED only lights up when the screen is off.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

131

Sound Settings

From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone.



From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Sound

The following options display:

Volume

The Volume option allows you to change the volume for all

phone sounds in one easy location.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Sound

➔

Volume

2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the sound volume

for Media, Ringtone, Notifications, and System.

3. Tap

Vibration intensity

Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the

vibration is for different options.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Sound

➔

Vibration intensity

2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration

intensity for Incoming call, Notification, and Haptic

feedback.

Ringtones

This option allows you to set the ringtone.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Sound

2. Tap

Ringtones

3. Tap a ringtone and tap

– or –

Tap

Add

to select a file from your music files.

Vibrations

This option allows you to set your phone to vibrate and ring.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Sound

2. Tap

Vibrations

3. Select a vibration pattern and tap

– or –

Tap

Create

and follow the on-screen instructions to

create your own vibration.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 132

Notifications

This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for

notifications and alarms.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Sound

2. Tap

Notifications

3. Tap a ringtone and tap

Vibrate when ringing

This option allows you to enable your phone to vibrate

whenever it rings.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Sound

2. Tap

Vibrate when ringing

to create a checkmark and

enable the feature.

System Tone Settings

The System tone settings are used when you use the dialing

pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the

screen.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Sound

2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark

and activate the feature:

• Dialing keypad tone

: makes a sound when you tap a key on

the keyboard.

• Touch sounds

: makes a sound when you touch the screen.

• Screen lock sound

: makes a sound when your screen is

locked or unlocked.

• Haptic feedback

: makes a vibration when you tap soft keys

and on certain UI interactions.

Adapt sound

The Adapt sound feature allows you to customize your call

sounds.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Sound

➔

Adapt sound

2. Read the instructions and tap

Start

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your

personal call sound.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

133

Home screen mode

Home screen mode allows you to set your display to the

conventional layout of

Standard mode

or provide an easier

user experience for the first-time smartphone users using

Easy mode

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Home screen mode

2. Tap the pull-down dropbox and select one of the

following options:

• Standard mode

: provides conventional layout for the apps and

widgets on your home screens.

•Easy mode

: provides easier user experience for first-time

smartphone users on the home screens.

3. Tap

Apply

Call Settings

To access the Call settings menu:



From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

– or –



From the Home screen, tap ➔ ➔

Call

settings

Call rejection

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Call rejection

2. Tap the

OFF / ON

icon to turn Auto reject mode on

3. Tap

Auto reject mode

and tap one of the following

options:

•Off

: to turn Auto reject mode off.

• All numbers

: to reject all calls.

• Auto reject numbers

: to reject all calls in your Reject list.

4. Tap

Auto reject list

5. Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list.

6. Tap

Unknown

, to create a checkmark and automatically

reject all calls that are not in your Contacts list.

Set rejection messages

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Set up call rejection messages

2. Tap to manually add a reject message.

– or –

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 134

Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed

when you want the call to be rejected. You can edit the

message if desired.

3. Tap

Save

to save the reject message.

Answering/ending calls

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Answering/ending calls

2. The following options are available:

• The home key answers calls

: Tap this option to be able to

accept incoming calls by pressing the Home key.

• Voice control

: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming

calls by using your voice.

• The power key ends calls

: This option will allow you to end a

call by pressing the power key without turning off the screen.

Turn off screen during calls

This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that

your phone will know to turn the screen off to save power.



From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Turn off screen during calls

create a checkmark and enable the feature.

Call alerts

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Call alerts

2. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and

activate the features:

• Answer vibration

: enables your phone to vibrate when the

called party answers the phone.

• Call-end vibration

: enables your phone to vibrate when the

call ends.

• Call connect tone

: plays a tone when a call is connected.

• Minute minder

: beeps twice every minute that you are on a

call.

•Call end tone

: plays a tone when a call is ended.

• Alerts during calls

: turns on alarm and message notifications

during a call.

Call Accessories

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Call accessories

2. The following options are available:

• Automatic answering

: configures the device to automatically

answer and incoming call when a headset is detected.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

135

• Automatic answering timer

: configures the time delay before

the device automatically accepts the incoming call.

• Outgoing call conditions

: allows you to make calls even when

the device is locked.

Additional settings

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Additional settings

2. Tap one of the following options:

•Caller ID

: allows you to choose how your Caller ID will be

displayed. Select Network default, Hide number, or Show

number.

• Call forwarding

: allows you to forward your calls to another

number.

• Auto area code

: allows you to automatically prepend a specific

area code to all outbound calls.

• Call waiting

: the network service informs you when someone

is trying to reach you during another call. Tap to activate.

• Auto redial

: automatically redials the last number if the call

was either cut off or was unable to connect. Tap to activate.

• Fixed dialing numbers

: allows you to restrict outgoing calls to

a limited set of phone numbers.

Using Fixed Dialing Numbers

Enabling FDN

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Additional settings

➔

Fixed dialing

numbers

2. Tap

Enable FDN

3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap

FDN is enabled.

4. To enable FDN after it has been disabled, tap

Disable

FDN

, enter your PIN2 code and tap

Important!

Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card

does not, this menu does not display.

The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering

an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to

lock. Contact customer service for assistance.

Changing the PIN2 Code

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Additional settings

➔

Fixed dialing

numbers

2. Tap

Change PIN2

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 136

3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.

4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.

5. Confirm your PIN2 code.

Managing the FDN List

When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to

phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.

Note:

Before you can manage an FDN list a list must be

created.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Additional settings

➔

Fixed dialing

numbers

2. Tap

FDN list

3. A list of all existing FDN numbers will be displayed.

Ringtones and keypad tones

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Ringtones and keypad tones

2. Tap

Ringtones

, select a ringtone, and tap

3. Tap

Vibrations

, select a vibration type, and tap

4. Tap

Vibrate when ringing

to create a checkmark if you

want your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming.

5. Tap

Keypad tones

to create a checkmark if you want

tones to play when the keypad is pressed.

Personalize call sound

This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear

during a call with and without earphones.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Personalize call sound

2. At the Personalize call sound display, tap one of the

following options:

• Adapt sound

: allows you to customize your sounds. Follow the

on-screen instructions to set up your personal call sound.

•Soft sound

: plays a softer sound when the other party is in a

noisy environment.

• Clear sound

: plays a clearer sound when the other party

sounds unclear or muffled.

•Off

: turns off your customized call sound and plays the default

sounds.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

137

Noise reduction

This option helps to suppress background noise from your

side during a call.



From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Noise reduction

to create a

checkmark and enable the feature.

Increase volume in pocket

This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is

in a pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its

location.



From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Increase volume in pocket

create a checkmark and enable the feature.

Voicemail service

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Voicemail Service

Voicemail service provided by your carrier is the

default.

2. Tap

My carrier

to remove the carrier Voicemail service.

Voicemail settings

You can view or modify your voicemail number from this

menu.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Voicemail settings

2. Tap the

Voice mail number

field, backspace to erase the

digits, and enter a new voicemail number using the

keypad, then tap

3. Tap

Sound

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

Sound

2. Tap a ringtone to hear it played.

3. Select a ringtone and tap

Vibrate

This option allows you select vibration settings.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

2. Tap

Vibrate

to create a checkmark and activate the

Vibrate feature.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 138

TTY Mode

A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a

telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,

hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities,

to communicate by telephone.

Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please

check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure

that it is compatible with digital cell phones.

Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable

that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was

not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device

manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Call

➔

TTY mode

2. Tap

TTY Full

TTY HCO

, or

TTY VCO

. A green checkmark

will appear. Tap

TTY Off

to turn it off.

Blocking Mode

When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected

features will be disabled. You will only receive notifications of

incoming calls from people on your allowed list.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Blocking mode

2. In a single motion touch and slide the

Blocking mode

slider to the right to turn it on .

Confirm that the Blocking mode active icon

appears in the Status bar.

3. Place a green checkmark adjacent to those features

you would like to enable. Choose from: Disable

incoming calls, Disable notifications, Disable alarm and

timer, Disable LED indicator.

4. Configure a timeframe for these features to be active.

Remove the checkmark from the

Always

field to

configure the

From

and

time fields.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

139

5. Tap

Allowed contacts

to assign those contacts that are

exempted from these rules. Choose from None, All

contacts, Favorites, or Custom. Allowed contacts will

then appear in the

Allowed contact list

Power saving mode

Power saving mode allows you to manage your phone to

conserve power.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Power saving mode

2. Tap the

OFF / ON

icon next to

Power saving mode

to turn

Power saving mode on .

3. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and

conserve power:

• CPU power saving

: allows you to limit the maximum

performance of the CPU.

• Screen power saving

: allows you to lower the screen power

level.

• Turn off haptic feedback

: allows you to turn off vibration when

you tap or touch the screen.

4. Tap

Learn about Power saving mode

to learn about

various ways to conserve battery power.

Accessory Settings

This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when

using a car or desk dock.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Accessory

2. Tap

Dock sound

to play sounds when inserting or

removing the phone from the dock.

3. Tap

Audio output mode

to use the external dock

speakers when the phone is docked.

4. Tap

Desk home screen display

to display the desk home

screen whenever the phone is docked.

5. Tap

Automatic unlock

if you are using a phone cover

and you want your phone to unlock when you open the

cover.

6. Tap

Audio output

to set your Audio output to Stereo or

Surround.

Accessibility

Accessibility services are special features to make using the

device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use

the Accessibility settings to activate these services.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 140

Note:

You can download accessibility applications from Play

Store and manage their use here.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Accessibility

2. The following options are available:

• Auto-rotate screen

: automatically rotate the screen from

landscape to portrait when you rotate your phone.

• Screen timeout

: timeout the accessibility feature after a

defined amount of time.

• Secured lock time

: allows you to set the time of inactivity that

passes before your screen locks.

• Speak passwords

: reads out password information.

• Answering/ending calls

: accept incoming calls by pressing

the home key or end calls using the power key.

•Show shortcuts

: allow the accessibility shortcut under the

device options to be used by pressing and holding the power

key.

• Manage accessibility

: save and update your accessibility

settings or share them with another device. You can export your

settings, import a previously saved file, or share your file with

another device.

• TalkBack

: activate the TalkBack feature.

Note:

TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback

to help blind and low-vision users.

Important!

TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,

except passwords, including personal data and

credit card numbers. It may also log your user

interface interactions with the device.

•Font size

: change the size of the fonts used on the device

within menus, options, etc. Choose from: Tiny, Small, Normal,

Large, or Huge.

• Magnification gestures

: use exaggerated gestures such as

triple-tapping, double pinching, and dragging two fingers

across the screen.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

141

• Negative colors

: reverse the display of on-screen colors from

White text on a Black background to Black text on a White

background.

• Color adjustment

: allows you to adjust the display colors if

you are color blind and have difficulty reading the display

because of the colors. Touch and slide the slider to the right to

turn it on . Follow the on-screen instructions.

• Accessibility shortcut

: allows you to quickly enable

accessibility features in 2 quick steps. Touch and slide the

slider to the right to turn it on . Follow the on-screen

instructions.

• Text-to-speech options

: allows you to adjust your text-to-

speech settings. For more information, refer to

“Speech

Settings” on page 146.

• Enhance web accessibility

: allows apps to install scripts

from Google that make their Web content more accessible. Tap

Allow.

• Sound balance

: allows you to use the slider to set the Left

and Right balance when using a stereo device.

• Mono audio

: allows you to enable stereo audio to be

compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a

single earbud/earphone.

• Turn off all sounds

: allows you to mute every sound made by

the device during taps, selections, notifications, etc.

• Flash notification

: allows you to set your camera light to blink

whenever you receive a notification.

• Assistant menu

: allows you to improve the device

accessibility for users with reduced dexterity. Touch and slide

the slider to the right to turn it on . Follow the on-

screen instructions.

• Tap and hold delay

: allows you to select a time interval for

this action. Choose from: Short, Medium, or Long.

• Interaction control

: allows you to enable or disable motions

and screen timeout. You can also block areas of the screen

from touch interaction. Touch and slide the slider to the right to

turn it on . Follow the on-screen instructions.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 142

Language and input

This menu allows you to configure the language in which to

display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard

options.

Language

You can change the language used by your device by

following these steps:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Language and input

➔

Language

2. Tap a language from the list.

Keyboards and Input Methods

You can change the keyboard used by your device by

following these steps:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Language and input

2. Tap

Default

and select a keyboard.

Select Samsung keyboard or Swype.

3. Tap

Set up input methods

4. Tap the icon next to the input method that you

would like to configure the settings for.

5. Based on your selection of input method, the

appropriate settings will appear and are explained

below.

Google voice typing settings

From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Language and input

2. Tap the icon next to

Google voice typing

3. The following options are available:

• Choose input languages

: tap on a language that you want to

input. Select

Automatic

to use the local language or select a

language from the list.

• Block offensive words

tap to create a checkmark and enable

the blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of

your voice-input Google typing.

• Download offline speech recognition

: Enables voice input

while offline.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

143

Samsung Keyboard settings

From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Language and input

2. Tap the icon next to

Samsung keyboard

• Portrait keyboard types

allows you to choose a keyboard

configuration (Qwerty [default] or 3x4 Keyboard).

• Input languages

sets the input language. Tap a language from

the available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected

language.

•Predictive text

enables predictive text entry mode. This must

be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and

hold to access the advanced settings. Touch and slide the slider

to the right to turn it on .

• SwiftKey Flow

allows you to type words by swiping between

on-screen keys.

• Cursor control

allows you to move the cursor by sliding your

finger across the keyboard.

• Handwriting

enables the device to recognize on-screen

handwriting and convert it to text.

• Advanced

displays the following advanced options:

–

Auto capitalization

automatically capitalizes the first letter of

the first word in each sentence (standard English style).

–

Auto spacing

automatically inserts spaces between words.

–

Auto-punctuate

automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence

by tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen

QWERTY keyboard.

–

Character preview

provides an automatic preview of the

current character selection within the text string. This is helpful

when multiple characters are available within one key.

–

Key-tap vibration

enables vibration feedback when you tap an

on-screen key.

–

Key-tap sound

enables auditory feedback when you tap an

on-screen key.

•Help

launches a brief on-screen tutorial covering the main

concepts related to the Samsung keyboard.

• Reset settings

resets the keyboard settings back to their

original configuration.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 144

Predictive Text Settings

From this menu you can set Predictive Text settings.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Language and input

2. Tap the icon next to

Samsung keyboard

Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the

Predictive text field, to turn it ON .

4. Tap

Predictive text

5. The following options are available:

• Personalized data

: allows you to use personal language that

you have added to make your prediction results better.

• Learn from Facebook

: allows you to login to your Facebook

account so your phone can learn your Facebook style.

•Learn from Gmail

: allows you to login to your Gmail account so

your phone can learn your Gmail style.

• Learn from Twitter

: allows you to login to your Twitter account

so your phone can learn your Twitter style.

• Learn from Messaging

: allows your device to learn from your

Messages.

• Learn from Contacts

: allows your device to learn from your

Contacts.

• Clear remote data

: deletes anonymous data that is stored on

the personalization server.

• Clear personal data

: removes all personalized data that you

have entered.

• Privacy policy

: click the link to read the privacy policy. Follow

the on-screen instructions.

Swype Keypad Settings

To configure Swype settings:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Language and input

2. Tap the icon next to

Swype

3. Tap

How to Swype

to view an on-screen manual for

Swype.

4. Tap

Gestures

to view helpful information on using

gestures while using Swype.

5. Tap

Preferences

to alter these settings:

• Vibrate on keypress

: activates a vibration sensation as you

enter text using the keypad.

• Sound on keypress

: turns on sounds generated by the Swype

application.

• Show helpful tips

: turns on a flashing indicator for quick help.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

145

•Auto-spacing

: automatically inserts a space between words.

When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start

the next word.

• Auto-capitalization

: automatically capitalizes the first letter of

a sentence.

•Show complete trace

: once enabled, sets wether or not to

display the complete Swype path.

• Pop-up on keypress

: once enabled, displays a character

above an on-screen key while typing.

• Next word prediction

: once enabled, predicts the next word in

your text string based on your current text entries.

Note:

If incorrect words are being entered as you type,

disabled this feature.

• Reset Swype’s dictionary

: once enabled, deletes any words

you have added to Swype’s dictionary.

•Version

: displays the software version information.

6. Tap

Language Options

to activate and select the current

text input language. Default language is US English.

7. Tap

Swype Connect

to activate and configure the

following data settings:

•Register now

: allows you to register with Swype so you can

take advantage of backup and sync options.

• Backup & Sync

: allows you to backup your Swype dictionary

and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices.

• Contribute data usage

: when enabled, allows the Nuance

application to collect usage data for better word predictions.

• Cellular data

: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by

the Swype application so it can receive program updates,

language downloads, and other related features via your

existing data connection.

8. Tap

Personalization

to activate and configure the

following social media personalization settings.

•Edit Dictionary

: allows you to edit your personal Swype

dictionary.

• Facebook

: allows you to log into your current Facebook

account from where contact names are added to your Swype’s

personal dictionary for later use when you enter names into text

fields. Helps recognize familiar names.

•Twitter

: allows you to sing into your existing Twitter account

from where names and words are added to your personal

dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names and words.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 146

•Gmail

: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from

where existing contact information is added to your personal

dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names.

9. Tap

Updates

to update the application if new software

is available.

Speech Settings

This menu allows you to set the speech settings for Voice

input.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Language and input

2. Tap

Voice search

to configure the following:

• Language

: Choose a language for your voice input.

• Speech output

: Sets whether you will use speech output

always or only when using hands-free.

• Block offensive words

: Enable or disable blocking of

recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input

Google searches.

• Hotword detection

: Enable to being able to launch voice

search by saying the word “Google”.

• Download offline speech recognition

: Enables voice input

while offline.

• Personalized recognition

: enables the improvement of

speech recognition accuracy.

• Google Account dashboard

: allows you to manage your

collected data.

• Bluetooth headset

: allows you to record audio through a

Bluetooth headset if available.

3. Tap

Text-to-speech options

and select

Google Text-to-

speech Engine

Samsung text-to-speech engine

4. Tap next to the preferred TTS engine configure the

following settings:

• Language

: allows you to set the language for spoken text.

• Settings for Google Text-to-speech Engine

: allows you to

view Open Source Licenses.

• Settings for Samsung text-to-speech engine

allows you to

view Open Source Licenses.

• Install voice data

: allows you to install voice data for speech

synthesis.

5. Scroll down to the

General

section to access the

following options:

• Speech rate

: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

147

• Listen to an example

: Play a sample of speech synthesis

(available if voice data is installed).

Pointer speed

This option sets your Pointer speed.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Language and input

2. Tap

Pointer speed

then drag the slider to the right to go

faster or to the left to go slower.

3. Tap

to save your setting.

Motions and Gestures

The Motions and Gestures settings allow you to set up

various Motion activation services. For more information on

using gestures, see “Using Motions and Gestures” on

page 32.



From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Motions and gestures

Air gesture

Air gesture allows you to control your device by performing

motions above the sensor.

1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap

Air gesture

2. Tap the ON/OFF icon at the top of your screen

to activate Air gesture.

3. Tap

Learn about the sensor and icon

to learn more about

the Air gesture sensor and its location.

4. The following Air gesture features are available:

• Quick glance

: when your screen is off, reach towards your

device and it will display information such as time, date, missed

calls, incoming messages, and battery strength. Tap the ON/

OFF icon to turn it on.

• Air jump

: move your hand up or down above the sensor to

jump to the top or bottom of a page or list. Tap the ON/OFF icon

to turn it on.

• Air browse

: move your hand to the right or left above the

sensor to move to the previous or next item such as pictures or

web pages. Tap the ON/OFF icon to turn it on.

• Air move

: use one hand to press and hold an icon then move

your other hand to the left or to the right above the sensor to

move the icon to another page. You can also use this feature in

your calendar to move events to another day. Tap the ON/OFF

icon to turn it on.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 148

• Air call-accept

: wave your hand above the sensor to accept an

incoming call. Tap the ON/OFF icon to turn it on.

5. Press ➔

Help

for additional information.

Motion

Motion allows you to control your device by performing

natural movements.

1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap

Motion

2. Tap the ON/OFF icon at the top of your screen

to activate Motion.

3. The following options are available:

• Direct call

: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently

displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the

device to your ear. Tap the ON/OFF icon to turn it on.

•Smart alert

: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and

notified of you have missed any calls or messages. Tap the ON/

OFF icon to turn it on.

• Zoom

: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content

can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points

on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to zoom

in or out. Tap the ON/OFF icon to turn it on.

• Browse an image

Once enabled, touch and hold a desired

on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right

to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally. Tap the ON/

OFF icon to turn it on.

• Mute/pause

: Once enabled, mute incoming calls and any

playing sounds by turning the device display down on a

surface. Tap the ON/OFF icon to turn it on.

4. Press ➔

Help

for additional information.

Palm motion

Palm motion allows you to control your device by touching

your screen with the palm of your hand.

1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap

Palm

motion

2. Tap the ON/OFF icon at the top of your screen

to activate Palm motion.

3. The following options are available:

• Capture screen

: Once enabled, you can capture any

on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single

motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe

form left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard. Tap

the ON/OFF icon to turn it on.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

149

• Mute/pause

: Once enabled, you can pause any on-screen

video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen

with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the screen,

the device goes back to normal by either continuing to play the

current video or unmuting the current sound. Tap the ON/OFF

icon to turn it on.

4. Press ➔

Help

for additional information.

Gyroscope calibration

Gyroscope calibration allows you to calibrate motion

correctly using the device’s built-in gyroscope.

1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap

Gyroscope

calibration

2. Place your device on a flat surface.

3. Tap

Calibrate

4. When finished,

Calibrated

will appear on your screen.

Tap to return to the previous screen.

Smart screen

The Smart screen options allow you to customize your

screen settings to make the screen more responsive and

easier to use.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Smart screen

2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark

and activate the features:

•Smart stay

: disables the screen timeout if your phone detects

that your face is watching the screen.

• Smart rotation

: disables the auto screen rotation by checking

the orientation of your face and the device.

• Smart pause

: pauses videos when your device detects that

your head has moved away from the screen.

3. Tap the ON/OFF icon to the right of the

Smart

scroll

field to activate the feature. With Smart scroll,

the screen will scroll depending on the phone’s tilt

angle once your eyes have been detected.

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 150

Air view

With the Air view feature, you can hover your finger over the

screen and Air view features will be displayed. For example,

you can hover your finger over a scheduled item in your

calendar to see more details.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Air view

2. Tap the ON/OFF icon at the top of your screen

to activate Air view.

3. The following options are available. Tap an option to

create a checkmark and activate the feature.

• Information preview

: allows you to see information previews,

extended text, and enlarged images when you hover your

finger over the screen.

• Progress preview

: allows you to preview a scene or show

elapsed time when you hover your finger over the progress bar

while watching a video.

• Speed dial preview

: allows you to see the contacts and their

speed dial numbers when you hover your finger over them in

your contacts list.

• Webpage magnifier

: allows you to see magnified links on

webpages when you hover your finger over them.

• Sound and haptic feedback

: allows you to play sound and

feel vibration when you hover your finger over Air view items.

Voice control

The Voice control settings allow you to set up voice

commands to control your device.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

My device

➔

Voice control

2. Tap the ON/OFF icon at the top of your screen

to activate Voice control.

3. The following options are available. Tap an option to

create a checkmark and activate the feature.

• Incoming calls

: allows you to answer or reject calls using the

commands

Answer

and

Reject

•ChatON

: allows you to answer or reject calls using the

commands

Answer

and

Reject

•Alarm

: allows you to stop or snooze an alarm by using the

commands

Stop

and

Snooze

•Camera

: allows you to take pictures using the voice

commands

Smile

Cheese

Capture

, or

Shoot

My device

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

151

•Music

: allows you to control your Music app using the voice

commands

Pause

Play

Volume Up

, and

Volume Down

Note:

If you set the alert type for calls or alarms to vibration,

voice control will not be available.

Add Account

This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize

accounts, including your Google and email accounts.

Adding an Account

1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔

Accounts

➔

Add account

2. Tap one of the account types.

3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your

credentials and set up the account.

A green circle will appear next to the account type once

you have created an account. Your email account will

also be displayed in the

My accounts

section of the

main Accounts menu.

Removing an Account

Important!

Removing an account also deletes all of its

messages, contacts, and other data from the

device.

1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔

Accounts

2. Tap the account which is located in the

My accounts

section.

3. Tap the account name.

4. At the bottom of the screen, tap

Remove account

, then

tap

Remove

account

at the prompt to remove the

account and delete all its messages, contacts, and

other data.

Synchronizing Accounts

Select the items you want to synchronize on your account

such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more.

1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔

Accounts

2. Tap the account which is located in the

My accounts

section.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 152

3. Tap the account name.

4. Tap

Sync now

to synchronize your account or only tap

the Sync items that you want to synchronize.

5. Tap

Cancel sync

to stop the synchronization.

6. Tap

Account settings

to access your account settings.

7. Tap

Storage usage

to see your storage usage for

different applications.

Back up and reset

The Back up and reset settings allow you to back up your

data, back up accounts, automatically restore your phone,

and reset your phone settings to the factory settings.

Back Up My Data

By setting this option, the Google server will back up all of

your settings and data.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Accounts

➔

Back up and reset

2. Tap

Back up my data

to enable or disable back up of

application data, WI-Fi passwords, and other settings

to the Google server.

Backup Account

If you have enabled the

Back up my data

option, then the

Backup account

option is available.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Accounts

➔

Back up and reset

2. Tap

Backup account

and tap your Google Gmail account

or tap

Add account

to set your Google Gmail account to

be backed up to the Google server.

Automatic Restore

By setting this option, when you reinstall an application, all of

your backed up settings and data will be restored.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Accounts

➔

Back up and reset

2. Tap

Automatic restore

to enable or disable automatic

restoration of settings from the Google server.

Factory Data Reset

From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings

to the factory default settings.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Accounts

➔

Back up and reset

2. Tap

Factory data reset

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

153

The Factory data reset screen displays reset

information.

3. Tap

Reset device

, then follow the prompts to perform

the reset.

Warning!

Performing a Factory data reset will erase all data

from your phone and internal SD card, including your

Google account, system and application data and

settings, and downloaded applications. It will not

erase current system software, bundled

applications, and external SD card files such as

music and photos.

Location services

The Location services settings allow you to set up how the

phone will determine your location and the sensor settings

for your phone.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Location services

2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark

and activate the service:

• Access to my location

: allows apps that have asked your

permission to use your location information. Tap the ON/OFF

icon to turn it on.

• Use GPS satellites

: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint

your location.

• Use wireless networks

: allows applications to use data from

mobile networks and Wi-Fi to help determine your location.

• My places

: allows you to add location information for your

Home, Office, and Car.

Security

The Security settings allow you to determine the security

level for your phone.

Encryption

To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your phone

each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD

card each time it is connected:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Security

2. You must first set up a screen lock type if you haven’t

already done so. For more information, refer to “Screen

Lock” on page 128.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 154

3. Tap

Encrypt device

. For more information, read the

displayed help screen.

4. Tap

Encrypt external SD card

to enable the encryption

on SD card data that requires a password be entered

each time the microSD card is connected.

Tip:

Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.

Encryption may take an hour or more.

Set up/change password

Use this option to set up your password when one is first

required or change your current password.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Security

➔

Set up/change password

2. Enter a new password and tap

Confirm

3. Enter the new password again and tap

Confirm

Set up SIM card lock

Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make

unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on

your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.

When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each

time you use the phone. Using this option you can also

change your SIM PIN number.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Security

2. Tap

Set up SIM card lock

3. Tap

Lock SIM card

, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap

Note:

You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change

your SIM PIN code.

4. Tap

Change SIM PIN

5. Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap

6. Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap

7. Re-type your new SIM PIN code and tap

Forgotten SIM PIN password

If you enter the wrong SIM PIN more than 3 times, you will

need to contact your AT&T Customer Service Representative

to get the PUK code for your device.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

155

1. Each time you enter a wrong SIM PIN number the

phone will display how many attempts you have

remaining.

2. After the third incorrect attempt, the

Type PUK and new

PIN code

screen displays and your SIM card is locked.

3. Enter the new PUK code that you received from your

AT&T Customer Service Representative in the

PUK code

field.

4. Enter a new PIN code in the

New PIN code

field and tap

5. Enter the new PIN code again in the

Confirm PIN code

field and tap

Note:

While your SIM PIN is locked, you will still be able to

make Emergency calls if necessary.

Make passwords visible

When enabled, password characters display briefly as you

touch them while entering passwords.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Security

2. Tap

Make passwords visible

to create a checkmark and

enable or disable the display of password characters.

Device Administrators

The Device Administration feature allows you to select one or

more administration applications that control your device for

security purposes (for example, if your phone is lost of

stolen). These applications enforce remote or local device

security policies.

Some of the features a device administration application

might control are:

•

Setting the number of failed password attempts before the

device is restored to factory settings.

•

Automatically locking the device.

•

Restoring factory settings on the device.

Note:

If a device uses multiple enabled administration

applications, the strictest policy is enforced.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Security

2. Tap

Device administrators

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 156

3. Select a device administrator and follow the prompts. If

no device administrators are listed, you can download

them from the Play Store.

Unknown sources

This feature allows you to download and install non-Market

applications.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Security

2. Tap

Unknown sources

A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.

Warning!

Enabling this option causes your phone and personal

data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications

from unknown sources.

Verify apps

This feature allows you to either block or warn you before

installing apps that may cause harm to your phone.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Security

2. Tap

Verify apps

A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.

Trusted Credentials

If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or

for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or

remove it.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Security

2. Tap

Trusted credentials

The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:

• System

: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed

in the ROM of your device.

•User

: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for

example, in the process of installing a client certificate.

3. Tap a CA certificate to examine its details.

A scrolling screen displays the details.

4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and tap

Disable

to disable a System certificate or

Remove

remove a User certificate.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

157

Caution!

When you disable a system CA certificate, the

Disable

button changes to

Enable

, so you can enable the

certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a

user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently

deleted and must be re-installed, if needed.

5. Tap

to return to the certificate list.

When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.

Install from device storage

Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.

Note:

You must have installed a memory card containing

encrypted certificates to use this feature.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Security

2. Tap

Install from device storage

, then choose a

certificate and follow the prompts to install.

Clear credentials

Clear stored credentials.

Note:

This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted

certificates.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Security

2. Tap

Clear credentials

to remove all certificates.

Application Manager

You can download and install applications from Play Store or

create applications using the Android SDK and install them

on your device. Use Application manager settings to manage

applications.

Warning!

Because this device can be configured with system

software not provided by or supported by Google or

any other company, end-users operate these devices

at their own risk.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 158

Memory Usage

See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running

applications.

1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔

➔

Application manager

2. Tap

Downloaded

Running

, or

All

to display memory

usage for that category of applications.

The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows

used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom

of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.

Downloaded

Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.

1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔

➔

Application manager

2. Tap the

Downloaded

tab to view a list of all the

downloaded applications on your device.

3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the

Downloaded tabs, press ➔

Sort by size

Sort by

name

4. To reset your application preferences, press ➔

Reset app preferences

Note:

This will reset the preferences for disabled apps,

disabled app notifications, default applications for

actions, and background data restrictions for apps. You

will not lose any app data.

5. Tap an application to view and update information

about the application, including memory usage, default

settings, and permissions.

Running Services

View and control services running on your device.

1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔

➔

Application manager

2. Tap the

Running

tab. All the applications that are

currently running on the device display.

3. Tap

Show cached processes

to display all the cached

processes that are running. Tap

Show services in use

switch back.

4. Tap one of the applications to view application

information.

The following options display:

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

159

•Stop

: Stops the application from running on the device. This is

usually done prior to uninstalling the application.

Warning!

Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services

may have undesirable consequences on the

application or Android System.

•Report

: Report failure and other application information.

Note:

Options vary by application.

Battery

See how much battery power is used for device activities.

1. From a Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔

➔ Battery.

The battery level displays in percentage. The amount

of time the battery was used also displays. Battery

usage displays in percentages per application.

2. Tap

Screen

Android System

Android OS

Cell standby

Media server

Device idle

, or any other listed application

to view how it is affecting battery use.

Note:

Other applications may be running that affect battery

use.

Storage

From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the

memory card and USB as well as mount or unmount the SD

card.

For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD

card, see “Memory Card” on page 48.

To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:



From the Home screen, tap ➔ Settings ➔

➔ Storage.The available memory displays under

the

Total space

and

Available

space

headings for both

Device memory and SD card.

SD card



Tap

Unmount SD card

to unmount your SD card so that

you can safely remove it, then tap

– or –

1. Tap

Format SD card

to format your SD card. This will

delete all data on your SD card including music, videos,

and photos.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 160

2. Tap

Format SD card

again.

3. Tap

Delete all

to continue or press to cancel.

Note:

The

Format SD card

option is only available when your

SD card is mounted.

Date and time

This menu allows you to change the current time and date

displayed.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Date and time

2. Tap

Automatic date and time

to allow the network to set

the date and time.

3. Tap

Automatic time zone

to allow the network to set the

time zone.

Important!

Deactivate

Automatic date and time

to manually set

the rest of the options.

4. Tap

Set date

and tap the up and down arrows to set the

Month

Day

, and

Year

then tap

Set

5. Tap

Set time

and tap the up and down arrows to set the

Hour

Minute

, and

, then tap

Set

6. Tap

Select time zone

, then tap a time zone.

7. Optional: Tap

Use 24-hour format

. If this is not selected

the phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.

8. Tap

Select date format

and tap the date format type.

About Device

This menu contains legal information, system tutorial

information, and other phone information such as the model

number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version,

and software build number.

To access phone information:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

About device

2. The following information displays:

• Software update

: allows you to update your phone software, if

available. For more information, refer to

“Software Update”

on page 161.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

161

• Status

: displays the Battery status, Battery level (percentage),

Network, Signal strength, Mobile network type, Service state,

Roaming status, Mobile network state, the phone number for

this device (My phone number), IMEI number, IMEISV number,

IP address, Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial

number, Up time, and Device status.

• Legal information

: This option displays information about

Open source licenses as well as Google legal information. This

information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal

information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service,

pertinent information as a reference. Read the information and

terms, then press

to return to the Settings menu.

• Device name

: displays the phone’s model name.

• Model number

: displays the phone’s model number.

• Android version

: displays the android version loaded on this

handset.

•Baseband version

: displays the baseband version loaded on

this handset.

•Kernel version

: displays the kernel version loaded on this

handset.

• Build number

: displays the software, build number.

• SELinux status

: displays the status of SELinux. SELinux is a

set of security policies/modules which is applied to the device

to improve the overall security.

Note:

Baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used

for updates to the handset or support. For additional

information please contact your AT&T service

representative.

Software Update

The AT&T Software Update feature enables you to use your

phone to connect to the network and upload any new phone

software directly to your phone. The phone automatically

updates with the latest available software when you access

this option.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

About device

➔

Software update

2. Tap

Check for updates

3. At the

AT&T Software update

prompt, tap

continue.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Changing Your Settings 162

4. The phone automatically updates the software (if

available), otherwise, when the

Current software is up

to date

prompt is displayed, tap

5. When updating software, once the update file is

downloaded, you can delay the update on the start

screen by postponing it for a certain period of time. If

you want to resume the update before the selected

time, tap

Continue update

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

163

Section 9: Connections

This section describes the various connections your phone

can make including accessing the Internet with your

Browser, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Connecting your PC.

Internet

The Browser is your access to the mobile web. This section

explains how to navigate the Browser and introduces you to

the basic features.

Accessing the Mobile Web

To access the Browser:



From the Home screen, tap

Internet

The AT&T/YAHOO! mobile homepage displays.

Navigating with the Browser

1. To select an item, tap an entry.

2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with

your finger in an up or down motion.

3. Sweep the screen left to right to move laterally across

a web page.

4. To return to a previous page, press .

5. To move forward to a web page, press .

Zooming in and out of the Browser

There are several ways to Zoom in and out on your browser

while in desktop view. After tapping on a link or article, use

one of these methods:

•

Tilting

: Tap and hold the screen at two points then tilt the device

back and forth to reduce or enlarge the screen. You must first

enable motion in the Settings section. For more information, refer

“Motions and Gestures”

on page 147.

•

Double tap

: Quickly tap the screen twice on the web page to

zoom in or out.

•

Pinching

: Sweep in opposite directions at the same time to zoom

in or out (use a pinching-in or pinching-out motion).

Browser Options

1. From the home page, press to access the

following options:

•Homepage

: displays the home web page.

• New window

: displays a new window so you can browse

multiple URLs. For more information, refer to

“Adding and

Deleting Windows”

on page 165.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Connections 164

• Add bookmark

: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list

• Add shortcut

: allows you to add a shortcut to your Home

screen.

• Save page

: allows you to store the current page in memory so

that it can be read later even if you loose your Internet

connection. It is saved in your Saved pages folder.

•Share via

: allows you to share the page using Bluetooth,

ChatON, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google, Google+, Messaging,

S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.

• Find on page

: allows you to search in the current page.

• Incognito mode

: pages viewed in incognito mode won’t

appear within your browser history or search history, and no

traces (such as cookies) are left on your device. For more

information, refer to

“Going Incognito”

on page 165.

•Saved pages

: contains web pages you have saved using the

Save page option.

•History

: displays your browsing history.

• Desktop view

: allows you to assign the browser to display the

current page in the desktop view (to closely mimic the display

as it would appear on a desktop computer).

•Brightness

: allows you to set the screen brightness.

•Print

: allows you to print the screen or web page on a

Samsung printer using Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct.

•Settings

: allows you to modify your web settings. For more

information, refer to

“Browser Settings”

on page 167.

•Help

: allows you view additional information concerning the

Internet application

Enter a URL

You can access a website quickly by entering the URL.

Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone.

To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these

steps:

1. Tap the URL field at the top of your screen.

2. Enter the URL using the on-screen keypad.

The website displays.

Search the Internet

To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these

steps:

1. Tap the Search bar at the top of the browser.

2. Enter the keyword(s) to search using the on-screen

keypad and tap .

3. Tap a link to view the website.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

165

Adding and Deleting Windows

You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time.

To add a new window, follow these steps:

1. From your browser, press ➔

New window

A new browser window is opened.

2. Tap (

Windows

) to see thumbnails of all open

windows.

3. Tap a window listing to open up that Internet window.

4. Tap at the top right corner of the web page

thumbnail to delete the window.

Going Incognito

The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites

outside of normal browsing. Pages viewed in this incognito

window won’t appear within your browser history or search

history, and no traces (such as cookies) are left on your

device.

Note:

Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your

device after you exit the incognito mode.

To add a new incognito window:

1. From your browser, press ➔

Incognito mode

2. At the information prompt, tap

3. A new browser window displays.

To exit from the incognito window:

1. From your browser window, tap (

Windows

2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the

incognito window. The incognito icon appears in

the upper-left of the new browser window while you

are in this mode.

3. Tap next to the incognito listing to delete this

window.

Using Bookmarks

While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to

quickly and easily access it at a future time. The URLs

(website addresses) of the bookmarked sites are displayed in

the Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can

also view your Most visited websites and view your History.

1. From the Home webpage, tap (

Bookmarks

The Bookmarks page is displayed.

2. Press to display the following options:

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Connections 166

• List/Thumbnail view

: Select

Thumbnail view

(default) to view

a thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select

List

view

to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed.

•Create folder

: Creates a new folder in which to store new

bookmarks.

•Delete

: Erases selected bookmarks.

• Change order

: Rearranges the current bookmarks.

• Move to folder

: Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected

folder.

3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and

hold a bookmark for the following options:

• Open in new window

: Opens the webpage in a new window.

• Edit bookmark

: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the

bookmark. For more information, refer to

“Editing

Bookmarks”

on page 166.

•Add shortcut

: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked webpage to

your phone’s Home screen.

• Share link

: Allows you to share a URL address using many

different options.

• Delete bookmark

: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more

information, refer to

“Deleting Bookmarks”

on page 166.

• Set as homepage

: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.

Adding Bookmarks

1. From any webpage, tap ➔ .

2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the Name, Address,

and Location.

3. Tap

Save

Saved to bookmarks

will appear at the bottom of the

page.

Editing Bookmarks

1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark

you want to edit.

2. Tap

Edit bookmark

3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the Name, Address,

and Location.

4. Tap

Save

Deleting Bookmarks

1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark

you want to delete.

2. Tap

Delete bookmark

3. At the

Delete

confirmation window, tap

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

167

Emptying the Cookies

A cookie is a small file which is placed on your phone by a

website during navigation. In addition to containing some

site-specific information, it can also contain some personal

information (such as a username and password) which can

pose a security risk if not properly managed. You can clear

these cookies from your phone at any time.

1. From the Home webpage, press ➔

Settings

➔

Privacy

➔

Delete personal data

2. Tap

Cookies and site data

to create a checkmark.

3. Tap

Done

Using your History

The History list provides you with a list of the most recently

visited websites. These entries can be used to return to

previously unmarked web pages.

1. From the Home webpage, press ➔

History

A list of your most recently visited websites is

displayed with Name and URL address.

2. Tap on a category such as

Today

Last 7 days

Most

visited

3. Tap any entry to display the webpage.

4. Press ➔

Clear history

to delete the History list.

Saving Pages

You can save a page for future viewing without making it a

bookmark.

1. From the Home webpage, press ➔

Save page

Page saved in Saved pages

is displayed.

2. The web page is saved.

Saved Pages

The Saved pages list provides you with a list of the websites

that you have saved.

1. From the Home webpage, press ➔

Saved pages

A list of your saved webpages is displayed with their

Name. The webpages that have been visited the most

will appear at the top.

2. Tap any entry to display the webpage.

Browser Settings

To make adjustments in your browser settings, follow these

steps:

1. From the Home webpage, press ➔ ➔

Settings

2. The following options are available:

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Connections 168

Basics:

• Set homepage

: Sets the current home page for the Web

browser.

• Auto fill forms

: allows you to enter text to be used in your web

profile. Tap Add profile, then enter text for the Web form auto

fill.

Privacy:

• Search and URL suggestions

: displays predictions of related

queries and popular websites in the address bar as you type.

• Preload available links before opening

: allows you improve

performance when loading pages.

• Remember form data

: Allows the device to store data from

any previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to

disable this function.

• Remember passwords

: Stores usernames and passwords for

visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.

• Delete personal data

: allows you to delete all personal data

such as Browsing history, Cache, Cookies and site data,

Passwords, Auto-fill data, and Location access.

Accessibility:

• Text scaling

: allows you to preview the text size, scale the text

size using a slider bar, set the zoom amount on double tap, and

minimize the font size using a slider bar.

• Force zoom

: allows you to override the website’s request to

control zoom.

• Text encoding

: adjusts the current text encoding.

• Fullscreen

: allows you to use Fullscreen mode to hide the

status bar.

• Text booster

: allows you to view PC websites easily by

boosting the text size. Note: the layout may change as a result.

Content settings:

• Accept cookies

: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and

read cookies from your device.

• Enable location

: Allows websites to request access to your

location.

• Enable JavaScript

: Enables Javascript for the current Web

page. Without this feature, some pages may not display

properly. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

169

• Block pop-ups

: Prevents popup advertisement or windows

from appearing on-screen. Remove the checkmark to disable

this function.

•Default storage

: Allows you to set your default storage to

Device or Memory Card.

• Website settings

: View advanced settings for individual

websites.

• Enable notifications

: Allows website notifications. Select

Always on, On demand, or Off.

• Clear notifications

: Deletes website notification access

information.

• Reset settings

: Restores all settings to default.

Bandwidth management:

• Preload webpages

: Allows the browser to preload pages in

the background. You can set to Always, Only on Wi-Fi, and

Never.

•Load images

: Allows web page images to be loaded along

with the other text components of a loaded website.

• Open pages in overview

: Displays an overview of newly

opened web pages.

Wi-Fi

About Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity"and sometimes referred to

as wifi) is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local

Area Networks (WLAN). These device types use an 802.11

wireless specification to transmit and receive wireless data.

Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing and

accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can

either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or

Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and

password).

Turning Wi-Fi On

By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off. Turning

Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover and connect to

compatible in-range WAPs.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Wi-Fi

2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi

field, to turn Wi-Fi ON .

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Connections 170

Connect to a Wi-Fi Network

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Wi-Fi

The network names and security settings (Open

network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi

networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks section.

2. Tap the network you want to connect to.

Note:

When you select an open network, you will be

automatically connected to the network.

3. Enter a wireless password if necessary.

Manually add your new network connection

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Wi-Fi

2. Tap

Add Wi-Fi network

3. Enter the

Network SSID

. This is the name of your

Wireless Access Point.

4. Tap the

Security

field and select a security option. This

must match the current security setting on your target

WAP.

5. If secured, you will also need to enter your WAP’s

password.

6. Tap

Show advanced options

, if you need to add

advanced options such as Proxy settings, IP settings,

or Key management.

7. Tap

Connect

to store the new information and connect

to your target WAP.

Note:

The next time your device connects to a previously

accessed or secured wireless network, you are not

prompted to enter the WAP key again, unless you reset

your device back to its factory default settings.

Turning Wi-Fi Off

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Wi-Fi

2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi

field, to turn Wi-Fi OFF .

Note:

Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and

Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery and

reduce your use times.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

171

Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Wi-Fi

2. Tap

Scan

All available Wi-Fi networks are displayed.

Wi-Fi Status Indicators

The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status at a

glance:

Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and

communicating with a Wireless Access Point

(WAP).

Displays when there is a Wi-Fi access point

available but you are not connected to it. May also

display if there is a communication issue with the

target Wireless Access Point (WAP).

Displays when connected to another device using

Wi-Fi Direct. For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi

Direct” on page 172.

Wi-Fi Advanced Settings

The Advanced Wi-Fi menu allows you to set up many of your

device’s advanced Wi-Fi services.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Wi-Fi

2. Press ➔

Advanced

The following options are available:

• Network notification

: alerts you when a new WAP is available.

• Passpoint

: allows you to connect to passpoint-enabled Wi-Fi

Access Points automatically. Touch and slide the slider to the

right to turn it on .

• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep

: allows you to specify when to

disconnect from Wi-Fi.

• Check for Internet service

: Checks if Wi-Fi internet service is

available when connected to an AP (Access Point).

• Auto connect

: allows you to be automatically connected to an

AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.

•MAC address

: view your device’s MAC address, required

when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).

•IP address

: view your device’s IP address.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Connections 172

Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can

transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.

Note:

See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi

Direct.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

➔

Wi-Fi

2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi

field, to turn Wi-Fi ON .

3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the

Wi-Fi Direct

button.

4. Repeat

steps 1 - 3

on the other device you want to

connect with. The steps on a different model of phone,

may be different.

5. On your phone, tap

Scan

The device scans for other Wi-Fi Direct devices.

6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,

tap on it.

7. The other device has 2 minutes to tap

for the

connection to be made.

8. Once connected, the other device will show as

Connected

in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the

icon will display at the top of your screen.

9. For additional information about Wi-Fi Direct, press

➔

Help

Sharing Information with Connected Device

To share Videos, Photos, or other information with the

connected device, follow these steps:

1. View the information that you want to share. For

example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in

your camera viewer or

My Files

folder, then tap the

Share,

Share via,

Send via

option.

2. Tap the

Wi-Fi Direct

option.

3. Tap the connected device name. For example,

Android_49ba.

4. Tap

Done

5. The file is transferred and the other device will receive

a screen notification that a Wi-Fi file has been

received. The file can be found in

My Files

➔

All files

➔

Device storage

in the

ShareViaWifi

folder.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

173

Note:

Depending on the other device model, the prompts and

shared folder information may differ.

AT&T Smart Wi-Fi

With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery

performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T

Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi

connections, and track your data use.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

AT&T Smart

Wi-Fi

2. The first time you access AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you will

need to install it. Tap

at the prompt.

3. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already

done so.

4. The Play Store displays the

AT&T Smart Wi-Fi

application. Tap

Update

5. Tap

Accept & download

6. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Wi-Fi.

For more information on how to use this application, go

www.att.com/smartwifi

NFC

NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when

you touch your device with another compatible device. This

is used for applications such as S Beam. To activate NFC on

your device, see “NFC” on page 125.

S Beam

When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another

NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.

You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music

files from your Music app, and more. For more information,

refer to “S Beam” on page 126.

Bluetooth

About Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that

allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth

devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and

Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and

wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is

usually up to approximately 30 feet.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Connections 174

Turning Bluetooth On and Off

To turn Bluetooth on:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the

Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON .

When active, appears within the Status area.

To turn Bluetooth off:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the

Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth OFF .

Bluetooth Status Indicators

The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status

at a glance:

Displays when Bluetooth is active.

Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and

communicating.

Bluetooth Settings

The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of

the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,

including:

•

Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth

communication and description

•

Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other

Bluetooth devices

To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Connections

2. Verify your Bluetooth is ON .

3. Tap

Bluetooth

To change your Bluetooth name:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

About device

➔

Device name

2. Use the keyboard to modify your device name and tap

To make your device visible:

1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press ➔

Visibility time-out

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

175

•

Making your device visible allows it to be detected by other

devices for pairing and communication.

2. Select a time that you would like your device visibility

to time-out.

To show received files:



From the Bluetooth settings page, press ➔

Received files

A list of all files received from Bluetooth is displayed.

To scan for Bluetooth devices:

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap

Scan

to search

for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such

as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.

Pairing Bluetooth Devices

The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted

connections between your device and another Bluetooth

device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey,

allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the

discovery and authentication process.

To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

2. Tap

Scan

. Your device will display a list of discovered

in-range Bluetooth devices.

3. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.

4. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap

5. The external device will then have to also accept the

connection and enter your device’s PIN code.

Once successfully paired to an external device,

appears within the Status area.

Note:

Due to different specifications and features of other

Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations

may be different, and functions such as transfer or

exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth

compatible devices.

Note:

Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time

process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices

will continue to recognize their partnership and

exchange information without having to re-enter a

passcode again.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Connections 176

Disconnecting a paired device

Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection

between the device and your phone, but retains the

knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to

reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the

connection information again.

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously

paired device (from the bottom of the page).

3. Tap

to confirm disconnection.

Note:

Disconnections are manually done but often occur

automatically if the paired device goes out of range of

your phone or it is powered off.

Deleting a paired device (unpair)

Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection

record” and upon reconnection would require that you re-

enter all the previous pairing information.

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap next to the

previously paired device. This opens the connected

device’s menu options.

3. Tap

Unpair

to delete the paired device.

4. Tap

Rename

to change the name of the paired device.

5. Tap

Call audio

to enable or disable call audio from the

paired device.

6. Tap

Media audio

to enable or disable media audio from

the paired device.

Sending Contacts via Bluetooth

Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities,

you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or

other items using a Bluetooth connection.

Note:

Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be

enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

2. From the Home screen, tap

Contacts

3. Press ➔

Import/Export

➔

Share namecard via

4. Tap each contact that you would like to send via

Bluetooth. A green checkmark will appear next to each

entry you select.

5. Tap

Done

6. Tap

Bluetooth

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

177

7. Select the paired device to send the contacts to.

Note:

The external Bluetooth device must be visible and

communicating for the pairing to be successful.

8. A Bluetooth share notification will appear in your

notifications list.

PC Connections

You can connect your device to a PC using your PC data

cable using various USB connection modes.

Storage

: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of

the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your

computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive.

Kies

: allows you to manage music, movies and photos. You

can also backup precious contacts and calendars, download

apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device

firmware. Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your

devices.

Note:

To sync your device to your PC, it is highly

recommended that you install Samsung Kies which is

available at

http://www.samsung.com/kies

(for Windows/

Mac).

Note:

If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have

Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your

computer. Also, ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0

or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your

computer.

Connecting as a Storage Device

You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and

access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the

device, you can also access the files directory from the

memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.

Note:

The file directory of the memory card displays as a

removable disk, separate from the internal memory.

1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the

cable to the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up

window displays on the PC when connected.

2. On the PC pop-up, click

Open device to view files

3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 178

Section 10: Applications

This section contains a description of each application that is

available in the Apps Menu, its function, and how to navigate

through that particular application. If the application is

already described in another section of this user manual,

then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.

Note:

This manual only addresses applications that have been

loaded on your device as of the date of purchase.

Information concerning third party applications that you

may choose to download from the Google Play Store or

otherwise should be obtained from the application

provider directly and not from Samsung.

Tip:

To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-

used applications to one of the Home screens. For details,

see “Customizing Your Home Screen” on page 40.

AT&T DriveMode

With the AT&T DriveMode application, you can set your

phone to auto reply when you are driving and don’t want to

answer the phone. You can set auto reply to Messages,

Emails, and Phone Calls. You can also allow up to five of your

contacts to contact you while you are in Drive mode.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

AT&T DriveMode

The

AT&T DriveMode

screen is displayed.

2. Read the Terms and Conditions and Privacy Policy and

tap

to continue.

3. Read the additional information and tap

Continue

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your AT&T

DriveMode options.

AT&T FamilyMap

AT&T FamilyMap provides peace of mind by being able to

conveniently locate a family member from your wireless

phone or PC and know that your family's location information

is secure and private.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

179

Note:

FamilyMap requires a paid subscription. To sign up for

service, visit

http://www.att.com/familymap

for more

information or contact your AT&T Customer Service

Representative.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

AT&T FamilyMap

Note:

The first time you use AT&T Family Map, you will need to

download the application from the Play Store. For more

information, refer to “Play Store” on page 194.

2. At the AT&T FamilyMap Sign In webpage, tap

Get

Started

to create an account.

– or –

Tap

if you already have an account.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions.

AT&T Locker

AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your

photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient

place; the AT&T cloud. For more information, refer to “AT&T

Locker” on page 86.

AT&T Navigator

AT&T Navigator provides you with access to real-time GPS-

driven applications. These programs not only allow you to

achieve turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local

searches.

Important!

You must have a data plan to use this feature.

Note:

These services require the purchase of a subscription.

To launch the AT&T Navigator application, follow these steps:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

AT&T Navigator

2. Read the

and tap

acknowledge the terms of use.

The first time that you use AT&T Navigator, the

necessary files will be downloaded. The AT&T

Navigator main screen displays.

3. Tap an AT&T Navigator plan that you choose to

purchase.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 180

AT&T Smart Wi-Fi

With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery

performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T

Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi

connections, and track your data use. For more information,

refer to “AT&T Smart Wi-Fi” on page 173.

Calculator

With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The

calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,

subtraction, multiplication, and division. The Calculator also

keeps a history of recent calculations.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Calculator

2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric

keys.

3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the

corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key.

4. Enter the second number.

5. To view the result, tap equals (

6. To view calculator history, tap located at the

top of the calculator buttons. A history of your past

calculations is displayed. Tap again to display

the calculator keypad.

7. To clear the calculator history, press ➔

Clear

history

8. To change the text size, press ➔

Text size

. Tap

Small, Medium, or Large.

9. Turn your phone sideways to the landscape position to

display the scientific calculator.

Calendar

With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by

day, week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act

as a reminder, if necessary.

To access the Calendar:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Calendar

2. The following tabs are available on the right side of the

display:

•Year

: displays the Year view.

•Month

: displays the Month view.

• Week

: displays the Week view.

•Day

: displays the Day view.

•List

: displays the List view.

•Task

: allows you to search for tasks.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

181

3. Tap (

Create event

) to create a new Calendar

event.

4. Tap

Today

to display the current date indicated by a

blue box.

5. Tap

Calendars

to select the calendar options that you

want displayed.

6. Press and select one of the following options:

•Go to

: displays a specific date.

•Delete

: allows you to delete All events, All events before today,

or an individual event.

•Search

: allows you to search within your current events.

•Sync

: allows you to synchronize your calendar with one or all of

your accounts. This option only appears when an account has

been opened.

• Settings

: displays a list of configurable settings.

Calendar Settings

1. From any Calendar view, press ➔

Settings

2. Tap

View styles

and select an option.

•

Tap

Month view styles

and select an option.

•

Tap

Week view

and select a type.

3. Tap

First day of week

and select either

Local default,

Saturday, Sunday

Monday

4. Tap

Hide declined events

to activate this option. A check

mark indicates selection.

5. Tap

Lock time zone

(to lock event time based on your

current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone

from within the

Select time zone

field.

6. Tap

Show week number

to display the week numbers

along the side of the week entries.

7. Tap

Calendars

and select the type of general

synchronization settings you want. A check mark

indicates selection.

8. Tap

Set alerts & notifications

to adjust the event

notification method. Choose from:

Alert

Status bar

notification

, and

Off

9. Tap

Select ringtone

to assign a ringtone to a calendar

event notification.

10. Tap

Vibration

to set the Event notification tone to

vibrate.

11. Tap

Quick responses

to select quick responses to

emailing guests.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 182

Camera

Use your 13.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a

JPEG format. Your phone also functions as a Camcorder to take

videos. For more information, refer to “Camera” on page 95.

ChatON

With the ChatON application, you can interact with friends

and family with text, images, hand-written notes and video

shared instantly. You can chat in groups, while a Web client

will allow the easy sharing of content and conversations

between your phone and PC. For more information, refer to

“ChatON” on page 117.

Chrome

The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google

Chrome web browser on your phone.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Chrome

2. Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap

Accept and Continue

3. If you have an existing Chrome account, tap

bring your open tabs, bookmarks, and omnibox data

from your computer to your phone, otherwise tap

thanks

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google

Chrome.

Clock

The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the

World Clock, set a stopwatch, and use a timer.

Alarm

This feature allows you to set an alarm to ring at a specific

time.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Clock

➔

Alarm

➔

Create alarm

. The following options

display:

•Time

: tap

(

) or (

Down

)

to set the new time for the

alarm to sound. Tap AM or PM.

•Alarm repeat

: use this option to set the repeating status for the

alarm by tapping on the days that you want the alarm to sound.

Tap the Repeat weekly checkbox to have the alarm repeat

weekly.

• Alarm type

: sets the way in which the alarm sounds when

activated (Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, and

Briefing).

•More

: displays the following additional options:

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

183

–

Alarm tone

: sets the sound file which is played when the

alarm is activated. Select an option or tap Add for additional

options.

–

Alarm volume

: drag the slider to adjust the alarm’s volume.

–

Location alarm

: when activated, the alarm only sounds

when you are at a specific location. Touch and slide the

slider to the right to turn it on then follow the on-

screen instructions to enter a location.

–

Snooze

: use this option to set a Duration (3, 5, 10, 15, or 30

Minutes) and Snooze repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 Times). Tap

the ON/OFF slider to activate.

–

Smart alarm

: tracks body movements and calculates the

best time for sounding the alarm. Place the phone

somewhere on your bed then the phone's movement sensor

(also known as accelerometer) is sensitive enough to work

from any part of the bed. Set the Interval and the Tone. Tap

the ON/OFF slider to activate.

–

Name

: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The

name will appear on the display when the alarm activates.

2. Tap

Save

to store the alarm details.

Turning Off an Alarm



To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and sweep the

icon to the right.

Setting the Snooze Feature



To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,

touch and sweep the icon to the left. Snooze must

first be set in the alarm settings. For more information,

refer to “Alarm” on page 182.

Deleting Alarms

To delete an alarm, follow these steps:

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Clock

➔

Alarm

➔

Delete

2. Tap the alarm or alarms you wish to delete. A green

checkmark will appear next to each selection. Tap

Select all

to delete all alarms.

3. Tap

Delete

World Clock

World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in

other parts of the world. World Clock displays time in

hundreds of different cities, within all 24 time zones around

the world.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 184

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Clock

➔

World Clock

. The clock for your time zone is displayed.

2. Tap

Add city

to add another city to the World Clock.

3. Scroll through the list of cities to find the city you want

to add, or tap the Search bar and use the keypad to

enter a city to search for.

4. Tap the city you want to add. The clock for that city will

display.

5. To set Daylight Savings time, press and hold a city,

then tap

DST settings

6. Select

Automatic

Off

, or

1 hour

7. If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol on

the World Clock listing will appear.

Deleting a World Clock Entry

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Clock

➔

World Clock

➔

Delete

2. Press and hold the city clocks you wish to delete.

3. Tap

Delete

Stopwatch

You can use this option to measure intervals of time.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Clock

➔

Stopwatch

2. Tap

Start

to start the stopwatch and tap

Lap

to mark a

unit of time per lap.

3. Tap

Stop

to stop the stopwatch.

4. Tap

Restart

to continue or tap

Reset

to erase all times

recorded.

Timer

You can use this option to set a countdown timer. Use a timer

to count down to an event based on a preset time length

(hours, minutes, and seconds).

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Clock

➔

Timer

2. The

Minutes

field is highlighted and set to 1 minute.

Use the keypad to set the number of minutes you want.

3. Tap the

Hours

field to set hours if desired. As you tap

different fields, they will become highlighted.

4. Tap the

Seconds

field to set seconds.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

185

5. Tap

Start

to begin the timer and tap

Stop

to pause the

timer.

6. After stopping, tap

Restart

to continue or tap

Reset

set the timer back to the original setting.

Desk clock

You can use the Desk clock when you have a desk dock and

you want your phone to display the time, day, date, location,

and weather conditions when it is docked.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Clock

➔

Desk clock

The default Desk clock is displayed.

2. Tap to display the Desk clock in full-screen mode.

3. To make changes, tap

➔

Settings

4. The following options are displayed while in full-screen

mode:

• Hide status bar

: when this is checked, the status bar is hidden

from view.

• Wallpaper

: tap to select Desk clock wallpaper from Default,

Gallery, or Same as home screen.

•Calendar

: when this is checked, the calendar is displayed. Tap

to uncheck.

• Weather

: when this is activated, the location, temperature, and

weather condition is displayed. Touch and slide the slider to the

right to turn it on .

•Dock

: allows you to set your Dock settings such as Dock

sound, Audio output mode, Desk home screen display,

Automatic unlock, and Audio output.

Contacts

You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name

and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can

be sorted by name, entry, or group.

You can also synchronize your phone Address Book with

AT&T Address Book, the network backup service.

For more information, refer to “Contacts and Your Address

Book” on page 68.

Downloads

Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current

downloaded files (Internet and Other).

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Downloads

All of your downloads are listed.

2. Tap an available file and select it for use.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 186

3. Choose an available action such as Share, Delete, Sort

by size, or Clear list.

Email enables you to review and create email using various

email services. You can also receive message alerts when

you receive an important email. For more information, refer

to “Using Email” on page 111.

Flipboard

This application creates a personalized digital magazine out

of everything being shared with you. Access news stories,

personal feeds and other related material. Flip through your

Facebook newsfeed, tweets from your Twitter account,

photos from friends and much more.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Flipboard

2. Swipe up on the Flipboard screen, then tap

Flipboard

Account

at the top of the display.

3. Tap

Create

to set up a new Flipboard account.

– or –

Tap

to log into your previously created profile.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Flipboard.

Gallery

The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.

For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a

slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and

share as a picture message. For more information, refer to

“Gallery” on page 92.

Gmail

Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured

when you first set up your phone. Depending on your

synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically

synchronize with your Gmail account on the web. For more

information, refer to “Using Gmail” on page 113.

Google

The Google Search application is the same on-screen

Internet search engine that is on the Google Search Bar on

your main Home screen. For more information, refer to

“Google Search Bar” on page 31.

Google +

Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a

lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream

to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast

messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

187

Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your

own private album on Google+. For more information, refer

to “Google +” on page 115.

Group Play

Group Play allows you to share pictures, music, and

documents in real-time with your friends. You can create a

group from your device or join other groups. You can also

play games with your friends.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Group Play

2. The first time you access Group Play, read the

Disclaimer and tap

The Group Play main screen is displayed.

Creating a group

If you have media you want to share, create a group.

1. From the Group Play main screen, if you want to set a

group password, tap the

Set group password

checkbox.

2. Tap

Create group

3. If you selected the

Set group password

checkbox in

step 1, enter a group password at the

Set group

password

prompt, and tap

Mobile AP is enabled.

4. Tap one of the media items listed under the

Share and

play content

heading.

5. Tap the items you want to share to create a

checkmark, then tap

Done

6. Have your friends sign onto Group Play from their

devices and they can view your media using you as a

Mobile AP.

7. Press ➔

Info

for information on the device that is

hosting the Mobile AP.

8. Press ➔

Help

for additional information.

Joining a group

If you want to see media from your friend’s phone, join a

group.

1. From the Group Play main screen, tap

Join group

2. Your phone scans for available groups for you to join.

3. Tap a group to join.

You will now be able to see your group’s shared media.

4. Press ➔

Info

for information on the device that is

hosting the Mobile AP.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 188

Help

The Help application provides detailed help for using your

phone and the included features and applications.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Help

2. Tap one of the following for more information:

• New features

: provides help on all of the new features and

applications such as Motion, Camera, Group Play, Story Album,

and S Health.

•Basics

: provides basic information on using your device.

•Applications

: provides information on how to use basic

applications like Contacts, Email, S Memo, Internet, Camera,

etc.

•Settings

: provides information on settings for Wi-Fi, Bluetooth,

Ringtone, Power saving mode, NFC, Air gesture, Air view,

Smart screen, Motion, and Screen Mirroring.

• Online help

: provides more detailed online help for additional

questions you may have.

• Available accessories

: provides information on accessories

for your phone that are available for purchase.

Internet

Open the web browser to start surfing the web. The browser

is fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to

enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone. For

more information, refer to “Internet” on page 163.

Local

Local is an application that uses Google Maps and your

location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars,

Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own

locations.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Local

2. Tap on one of the business categories to search for a

particular business.

All of the business categories that are close to you will

be displayed.

3. Tap on a business that you want to see the details for.

4. The business details such as address, phone, website,

and location are displayed. You can also see reviews

from around the web and from Google users.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

189

Maps

Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and

satellite maps and local business information, including

locations, contact information, and driving directions. You

can also post public messages about a location and track

your friends.

Important!

Before using Google Maps you must have at least

an active data (3G) connection. The Maps

application does not cover every country or city.

Enabling a Location Source

Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search

for places of interest, you must enable a location source. To

enable the location source you must enable the wireless

network, or enable the GPS satellites.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Settings

➔

Location services

2. Tap the

Use GPS satellites

field. A green checkmark will

display next to the field.

Note:

Selecting

Use GPS satellites

allows you to locate places

of interest at the street-level. However, this also requires

a clear view of the sky and uses more battery power.

To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the

following conditions:

•

inside a building or between buildings

•

in a tunnel or underground passage

•

in poor weather

•

around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields

•

in a vehicle with tinted windows

Using Maps

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Maps

A map will display with your location in the very center.

2. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the Maps

application.

Messages

The AT&T Messages app brings your texts, calls, and

voicemail messages together into a single conversation

thread and is accessible by phone or computer. For more

information, refer to “Messages App” on page 116.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 190

Messaging

You can send and receive different types of messages. For

more information, refer to “Messaging” on page 103.

Messenger

Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into

a simple group conversation. When you get a new

conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your

phone. For more information, refer to “Messenger” on page

115.

Mobile Hotspot

This application allows you to share your phones’s mobile

data connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. For

more information, refer to “Tethering & portable hotspot” on

page 123.

Mobile TV

Mobile TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch

your favorite TV shows using your handset. For more

information, refer to “Mobile TV” on page 90.

Music

Music allows you to play music files that you have stored on

your phone and memory card. You can also create playlists.

For more information, refer to “Music” on page 87.

My Files

My Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,

bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in

one convenient location.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

My Files

➔

All

files

2. Tap

Device storage

to see the contents of your internal

SD card.

3. The following folders may display:

•Alarms

: this folder contains any alarm files you may have.

•Android

: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android

applications.

•Application

: this folder contains app info for S Memo.

• Bluetooth

: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device.

•DCIM

: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken

by the device. Tap

DCIM

➔

Camera

to view the picture or

video files. For more information, refer to

“Viewing Pictures”

on page 93. Also, see

“Viewing Videos”

on page 93.

• Download

: this folder contains downloads you have made.

•Movies

: this folder contains your Video and Movie files.

•Music

: this folder contains your Music files.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

191

• Notifications

: this folder contains all of the notifications you

have received.

•Pictures

: this folder contains your photos.

•Podcasts

: this folder contains all of your podcasts.

•Ringtones

: this folder contains any ringtones you have

purchased.

•S Memo

: this folder contains all the S Memos you have written.

Note:

Different folders may appear depending on how your

phone is configured.

4. If you have an external SD card inserted, tap

memory card

to see the contents of your external SD

card (memory card).

myAT&T

The myAT&T application allows you to manage your own

AT&T account. You can review and pay your bill, check

minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or change

your rate plan.

Note:

The first time you use myAT&T, you will need to

download the updated application from the Play Store.

When the Play Store page displays, tap

Update

. For more

information, refer to “Play Store” on page 194.

Initial Setup

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

myAT&T

2. Sign into your Google Account. If you haven’t set up an

account, see “Creating a New Google Account” on

page 14.

3. After signing into your Google Account, the Play Store

displays the

myAT&T

application. Tap the application.

4. Tap

Update

5. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Using myAT&T

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

myAT&T

The

myAT&T

page is displayed.

2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap

continue.

3. Enter your

User ID

and

Password

using the on-screen

keypad, then tap

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 192

4. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Navigation

Navigation is an internet-connected GPS navigation system

with voice guidance. You can type or speak your destination.

Note:

For voice-guided navigation, you need to install text-to-

speech support from the Play Store.

To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the

following conditions:

•

inside a building or between buildings

•

in a tunnel or underground passage

•

in poor weather

•

around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields

•

in a vehicle with tinted windows

Launching Navigation

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Navigation

2. Read the Navigation information page and tap

to continue or

Don’t accept

to exit.

3. Select one of the following options:

• Speak destination

: allows you to speak your destination.

• Type destination

: allows you to use the keypad to enter your

destination.

•Go home

: takes you to your home address. The first time you

are prompted to enter it.

•Map

: takes you to the map location of your present location

using GPS.

• Recent Destinations

: allows you to access information on

previous destinations you have used. This option only appears

after you have entered one or more destinations.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Obtaining Driving Directions

Your phone’s built-in GPS hardware allows you to get real-

time driving directions to selected locations or

establishments based on your current location.

Using a Physical Address

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Navigation

2. Tap either

Speak Destination

Type Destination

3. If typing in the address, enter the address, City, and

State using the keypad. As you type, possible

addresses will be displayed. Tap on one when you see

the address you want.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

193

The route will be displayed.

4. If speaking the address, the Voice guidance screen is

displayed. For voice-guided navigation you need to

install text-to-speech support from the Play Store. Tap

Install

to install the application or tap

Skip

to exit.

Note:

You will need to be signed on to your Google account

before downloading applications from the Play Store. For

more information, refer to “Creating a New Google

Account” on page 14.

5. As you drive the route display will be updated and you

will receive voice-guided navigation directions.

6. Tap for additional options.

Optical Reader

The Optical reader allows you to use your camera to identify

text and extract useful information.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Optical Reader

2. Aim the camera at an object containing written words.

3. Align the on-screen box atop the target text. Once

detected, the device shows on-screen information

such as link and descriptions.

Phone

The Phone application allows you to access the dialer

keypad, call logs, and favorites. For more information, refer

to “Call Functions” on page 50.

Play Books

With Google Play Books, you can find more than 3 million

free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the

eBookstore.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Play Books

2. Log on to your Google account. For more information,

refer to “Creating a New Google Account” on page 14.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Play

Books application.

Play Magazines

With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your

favorite magazines and have them available to read on your

phone at any time or any place.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 194

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Play Magazines

2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already

done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a

New Google Account” on page 14.

3. At the Welcome! display, tap the shop icon to

browse the full catalog.

4. Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap

5. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view

Categories, Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.

6. Tap a magazine to see more information and

subscribe.

7. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a

magazine.

Play Movies & TV

With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of

different movies and television shows. You can watch

instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing

at a later time. For more information, refer to “Play Movies &

TV” on page 92.

Play Music

With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have

added to your music file as well as any music you copied

from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have

copied from your PC. For more information, refer to “Google

Play Music” on page 90.

Play Store

Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and

games to install on your phone. Play Store also allows you to

provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag

an application that might be incompatible with your phone.

Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account.

For more information, refer to “Using Gmail” on page 113.

1. From the main Home screen, tap

Play Store

2. Sign in to your Google account.

3. The first time you sign in, the Play Store Terms of

Service will be displayed. Tap

to continue or

Decline

to exit.

4. Tap

Apps

Games

, or

AT&T

to download or purchase

games or applications. You can also download updates

to existing applications.

5. Follow on the on-screen instructions.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

195

POLARIS Office 5

POLARIS® Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office

compatible office suite. This application provides a central

place for managing your documents online or offline. The

application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document

Format) files.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

POLORIS Office 5

2. Enter your Email information (if desired) and touch

to complete the process.

– or –

Touch

Skip

to ignore this registration.

The main POLARIS Office 5 screen displays.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use POLARIS

Office 5.

S Health

S Health is a wellness application that allows you to better

manage your health by providing you with relevant

information.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

S Health

2. Read the introduction and tap

3. Read the Use of S Health, Connection Third Party

Devices and Programs, and Information Used.

4. Tap the

Agree

checkbox in all 3 sections.

5. Tap

6. Enter your personal information, then tap

Start

7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use S Health.

8. Tap ➔

Help

for more detailed information.

S Memo

The S Memo application allows you to create memos using

the keypad, your finger, or both. You can add images, voice

recordings, and text all in one place.

Creating a New Memo

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

S Memo

2. Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to

enter edit mode.

– or –

Tap to start a new memo in text mode with the

keypad displayed or tap to start a new memo in

drawing mode using your finger or a compatible

on-screen writing tool. You can change back and forth

in a memo to add text with the keypad and the pen.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 196

The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described

in the following table: 3. Press to access the following options:

Note:

Depending on whether you have saved the memo, are in

keypad mode, or in handwriting mode, the options will

appear differently. The following is a list of the options

you may see.

Changes the view mode.

Allows you to add free-format drawing.

Displays the keypad to you can add text.

Toolbar

Show/Hide

Add Page

Writing area

Secondary

Keyboard

Toolbar

Eraser tool allows you to erase marks and drawings.

Undo the last action.

Redo the last action that was undone.

Make a voice recording to add to the memo. This option

is not available in free-format drawing mode.

Hide the secondary toolbar.

Show the secondary toolbar.

Provides access to a quick selection bar. Choose from:

Take picture, Images, Clipboard, Maps, and Clip art.

These elements can be used within the memo.

Add an additional page to the memo.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

197

•Share via

: allows you to share your memo as either an Image

file (.jpg), a PDF file (.pdf), Plain text, or S Memo file (.snb) via

Group Play, Wi-Fi Direct, Bluetooth, ChatON, Flipboard, Picasa,

Google+, Messaging, AT&T Locker, Gmail, or Email.

•Delete

: allows you to delete the S Memo.

•Export

: allows you to save the memo to your Gallery as either a

JPG or as a PDF.

•Save as

: allows you to save the memo with a different name.

•Add tag

: allows you to set tags to add in searches.

•Add to Favorites

: allows you to tag the current memo as a

favorite.

• Change background

: allows you to set the background for

your memo. Tap the background that you want, then tap .

• Create event

: allows you to link the memo to your Calendar

events.

•Set as

: allows you to set a memo as a contact icon, Home

screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper.

•Print

: allows you to print the screen or web page on a

Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.

When you are finished creating your memo, tap

Save

on the

top menu bar.

S Translator

With the S Translator you can easily translate words and

phrases into many different languages.

1. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not

already done so. For more information, refer to

“Creating a Samsung Account” on page 14.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

S Translator

3. At the S Translator screen, tap the top language bar

and enter your language.

4. Tap the language bar at the bottom of the screen to

select the language that you would like to translate to.

5. Enter text into the upper box and tap .

It will be translated into the language of the upper box.

– or –

Enter text into the lower box and tap .

It will be translated into the language of the lower box.

6. Tap either of the

Speak

buttons at the bottom of the

screen to translate using either language by using your

voice. The translation will appear automatically in the

appropriate box.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 198

7. Press for additional options.

S Voice

With the S Voice application you can use your voice to

perform operations that you would normally have to do by

hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message,

playing music, etc.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

S Voice

2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap

Confirm

continue.

3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap

Agree

continue.

4. Read the information on the

About S Voice

screen, then

tap

5. Read the information on the

Say what you want

screen,

then tap

6. Read the information on the

Wake up S Voice

screen,

then tap

7. Read the information on the

Edit what you said

screen,

then tap

8. Read the information on the

Help

screen, then tap

Finish

9. At the S Voice screen, tap or say “Hi Galaxy”

to wake up S voice.

10. Speak into the phone and follow the on-screen

instructions.

11. Press for additional options.

Samsung Apps

With Samsung Apps, you can download hundred of

applications from a variety of categories.

1. Sign on to your Samsung account if you have not

already done so.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Samsung Apps

3. Tap an application that you would like, then tap

Get

4. Tap

Accept and download

The application is downloaded to your device. You can

find the app icon in your app menu.

5. Press ➔

Help and notices

for additional

information.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

199

Samsung Hub

Samsung Hub is Samsung’s integrated store for media

content that offers a comprehensive and consistent media

service experience. You can browse and purchase all media

content within a single store front. For more information,

refer to “Samsung Hub” on page 81.

Samsung Link

With the Samsung Link app, you can share and play content

across smart devices anytime and anywhere. For more

information, refer to “Samsung Link” on page 84.

Settings

This widget navigates to the sound and phone settings for

your phone. It includes such settings as: display, security,

memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone.

For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on

page 118.

Story Album

With Story Album, you can create a digital Album of your

story in media. Special moments will be on a timeline, and if

you wish, you can have your album published as a hard copy.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Story Album

2. Read the introductory information and tap

3. Tap

Start

to begin your Story Album.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions.

5. Press ➔

Help

for additional information.

Talk

Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for

instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are

automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.

This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your

Gmail accounts. For more information, refer to “Google Talk”

on page 115.

TripAdvisor

With the TripAdvisor, you can plan and have your perfect trip.

With over 75 million reviews and opinions by travelers, it is

easy to find the best hotels, restaurants, and fun things to do.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

TripAdvisor

2. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not

already done so.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use TripAdvisor.

4. Press for additional options.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 200

Video

The Video application plays video files stored on your

memory card. For more information, refer to “Video” on

page 91.

Voice Recorder

The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to

one minute long and then immediately share it using Wi-Fi

Direct, Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording time

will vary based on the available memory within the phone.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Voice Recorder

2. To start recording, tap

Record

and speak into the

microphone.

3. During the recording process you can either tap

Stop

to stop and save the recording or

Pause

temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap

Record

to resume recording. Once the audio

recording has stopped, the message is automatically

saved. Tap

Cancel

to cancel the recording

without saving.

4. Tap

List

to display a list of all your voice

recordings. Tap a voice recording to play it.

5. Press

to display the following options:

•Share via

: allows you to share your recording using Bluetooth,

Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.

• Delete

: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap

the recordings to delete and tap

Delete

•Settings

: the following settings are available:

–

Storage

: allows you to choose where your recordings will be

saved. Select between Phone or memory card.

–

Recording quality

: allows you to set the recording quality to

High or Normal.

–

Limit for MMS

: allows you to select On or Off. If you Limit for

MMS by selecting On, you will be assured that the recording can

be sent in a message.

–

Contextual filename

: (requires GPS tagging) allows you to

adjust the filename based on contextual information such as

your current GPS location.

–

Default name

: allows you to choose the name prefix for your

recordings. For example, if your Default name is Voice, your

recordings would be named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003,

etc.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

201

–

Noise reduction

: allows you to activate/deactivate background

noise suppression.

–

Recording volume

: allows you to assign the ambient noise

quality of your current location so the device can better detect

audio. Choose from High or Low.

–

Channel

: allows you to assign recording mode to either Mono

or Stereo.

–

Skip interval

: allows you to assign a skip length.

•End

: allows you to close the application.

Voice Search

The Google Voice Search application allows you to search the

web using only your voice.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

Voice Search

2. When the Google Voice Search screen displays, speak

the word or words that you would like to search for on

the internet.

3. If the timer expires and the mic icon changes from red

to gray, tap the mic icon and speak the word or words

that you would like to search for on the internet.

Results are displayed on your phone.

4. The following options are available at the bottom of

your screen:

•

Web

: After selecting a different option, tap Web to return to the

original search results.

•

Images

: Displays images for your search.

•

Places

: Displays places and businesses in your local area

pertaining to your search.

•

: After tapping MORE, sweep your screen to the left to

see additional options such as News, Shopping, Videos, Blogs,

Discussions, and Books.

• Phone

: Displays a phone number if applicable.

WatchON

With the WatchON application, you can use your phone as a

remote control for your TV.

Important!

Before initiating use, verify you have an active

Internet connection available (either mobile

network or Wi-Fi connection).

Note:

Before beginning your initial WatchON application setup,

confirm your TV is turned off.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 202

Initial Configuration

1. Sign into your Samsung account.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

WatchON

Note:

If you are not connected to an active Wi-Fi, you may be

prompted to continue the set up process via a mobile

network. Click

Connect

to proceed.

3. Select your desired country for your TV Guide’s source

listing and tap

4. Enter your current zip code and tap

Done

. This zip code

must correspond to the location of your desired TV and

set top box.

5. From the

Find your TV service

screen, select a service

provider from the available channel listing.

6. From the

Choose your TV Brand

screen, tap your TV’s

manufacturer name.

•

If you have a brand of TV not listed or you are using a projector,

select from one of the following two options. Choose from

either

Other TV Brands

I Have a Projector

7. Aim your device at the TV and tap (

Power

) to

confirm the set up process completed successfully and

the correct TV IR codes were selected.

Note:

The process of the initial TV activation can take up to 10

seconds. Please do not press the button again.

8. If the TV turned on, tap

Yes

– or –

If the TV did not turn on after tapping (

Power

) and

waiting 10 seconds, tap

Retry

9. From the

Choose Your TV Tuner

screen, select the entry

that corresponds to your current channel control

method:

• Cable/Satellite/STB/PVR/DVR

: selected when changing

channels is done via a receiver box. Channels are not changed

via the TV remote but rather through the receiver/box.

• My xxx TV

: selected when a signal is fed directly into the TV

and no box is used. Channels are changed directly on the TV by

using the TV remote and not a box’s remote.

Note:

Try matching your current channel selection method.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

203

10. Select the Satellite Box Brand from the available list.

For example, DirectTV®.

•

If your brand does not appear in the list, tap

Other Satellite

Box Brands

and follow the on-screen instructions.

Important!

You must configure your set top box for IR

communication with your device. If you do not

select

More Info..

below and follow the on-screen

instructions you may not be able to properly use

the application.

11. When prompted to Enable IR, tap

More Info..

to learn

how to configure your set top box to receive and

respond to IR controls.

12. Only after completing the IR setup process and

programming your box, press .

Note:

This IR programming of your set top box is a one-time

process and once successful should not need to be

repeated.

13. If prompted to personalize your experience, follow the

on-screen instructions.

Using WatchON

To change channels:

1. Sign into your Samsung account.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

WatchON

3. From the top of the main screen, tap (

Remote

Control

). This launches an on-screen set of remote

control tabs. Choose from one of the following:

•Easy remote

: provides the most common used control

features. Scroll down to view additional functions.

• [Set top box]

: displays customized control specific to your

configured set top box. Ex: satellite dish remote control

functions.

•TV

: provides access to control functions specific to your TV.

4. From the top of the main screen tap (

Select Room

)

to choose from different receivers/boxes in different

rooms. (Example: Living Room box, Bedroom box, etc.).

5. Press to return to the main menu.

Locating your favorite programming:

1. Sign into your Samsung account.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

WatchON

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 204

3. From the main screen Tap (

Combined View

) to

reveal available media categories.

4. Select an available category.

– or –

Tap

Guide

to display on your TV an on-screen listing of

available set top box shows.

For additional information on the WatchON application,

press and then select

Help

WatchOn Settings

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

WatchON

2. Press and then select an available on-screen

option:

• Change Room

: allows you to select a previously configured

room.

•Settings

: provides access to the Samsung WatchOn settings

menu.

•Help

: displays on-screen help information.

•About

: displays on-screen information about the application.

Personalize WatchON

You can personalize your application to do things such as

show content only from your selected media categories, or

add an additional room’s set top box.

To configure your Just for you settings:

The Just for you option displays available content matching

your activated media categories. These categories can be

configured during your initial set up or at any later time.

1. Sign into your Samsung account.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

WatchON

3. From the main screen Tap (

Combined View

) ➔

Just for you

4. From the

On TV

tab, press and then select

Settings

5. Access parameters such as

Basic info

Genres

and

Sports

to then configure and enable those parameters

you would like to show in the Just for you tab.

To add a new room:

Your device can be used to control boxes/receivers from

several rooms. You could go from controlling your set top box

in your living room and then move into your bedroom to do

the same.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

205

1. Sign into your Samsung account.

2. From the Home screen, tap ➔

WatchON

3. From the

On TV

tab, press and then select

Settings

➔

Add room

4. Name the new room and tap

5. Enter your current zip code and tap

Done

. This zip code

must correspond to the location of your desired TV and

set top box.

6. Follow steps 4-10 starting on page 202 to complete

the process.

YouTube

YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users can

upload and share videos. The site is used to display a wide

variety of user-generated video content, including movie

clips, TV clips, and music videos, as well as video content

such as video blogging, informational shorts and other

original videos.

Note:

YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended

that you upgrade to a large data plan to avoid additional

data charges.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

YouTube

2. At the You Tube introduction screen, tap

3. Tap the search field to search for specific videos,

scroll down to browse through the main page

thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional

options.

4. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or

tap the title link.

To watch a high quality video:



Press and then tap

Settings

➔

General

➔

High

quality on mobile

To configure YouTube Settings:



Press and then tap

Settings

and configure the

following parameters:

• General

–

High quality on mobile

, when enabled, allows you to start all

videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile

network.

–

Caption font size

allows you to set the font size used by on-

screen captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or Huge.

–

Uploads

specifies network preferences for uploads.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Applications 206

–

Content localization

allows you to prioritize channels and

videos from a specific country or region.

–

Improve YouTube

allows you to anonymously send YouTube

information to help improve the application.

• Channel Feed Content

–

Sets the content that you want to appear within your channel

feed. All activity is the default option.

•Search

–

Clear search history

allows you to clear previous YouTube

searches from showing up in the YouTube search box.

–

Never remember history

allows you to force YouTube to never

store search history information.

–

SafeSearch filtering

allows you to configure block settings for

videos containing restricted content. This option blocks these

videos from appearing within your search results. Choose from:

Don’t filter, Moderate, or Strict blocking.

• Preloading

–

Preload subscriptions

allows you to preload (or go get videos

while on Wi-Fi and charging) your subscription videos.

–

Preload watch later

allows you to enable the preload function

on selected videos so you can watch them later. Read the data

usage information and tap

to accept the terms.

Note:

Preloading YouTube videos will use some of your

device’s storage space and may result in additional

charges if your Wi-Fi plan is not unlimited.

• About

–

Help

: provides answers to most YouTube questions.

–

Feedback

: allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.

–

Google Mobile Terms of Service

: displays the Google Mobile

–

YouTube Terms of Service

: displays the YouTube terms of

Service.

–

Google Mobile Privacy Policy

: displays the Google Mobile

–

YouTube Privacy Policy

: displays the YouTube Privacy Policy.

–

Open source licenses

: displays the Open source licenses

–

App version

: displays the software version for the current

YouTube application.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

207

Note:

It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view

content. However, if you wish to sign in to access

additional options, access the page via the Web browser

and tap

at the top right corner, enter your

YouTube or Google username and password, and tap

YPmobile

The Yellowpages Mobile application provides quick and ready

access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your

favorite searches. This application allows you to tap into local

businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your

search in real-time.

Note:

The first time you use YP, you will need to download the

updated application from the Play Store. When the Play

Store page displays, tap

Update

Install

then follow the

on-screen instructions. For more information, refer to

“Play Store” on page 194.

1. From the Home screen, tap ➔

YPmobile

2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already

done so. For more information, refer to “Creating a

New Google Account” on page 14.

3. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap

to continue.

4. Your location is found using GPS. Tap

to allow

YPmobile to use your current location.

5. Tap the

Find a business nearby!

field.

6. Enter information in the

What:

and

Near:

fields and tap

7. Results will be displayed.

8. Tap

(Map)

to see the locations marked with pins

on the map.

9. Pinch the map screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it

outwards to zoom in.

10. Tap a pin to read information about the location.

11. Tap

to display additional options.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Health and Safety Information 208

Section 11: Health and Safety Information

This device is capable of operating in Wi-Fi mode in the 2.4

and 5 GHz bands. The FCC requires that devices operating

within 5.15-5.25 GHz may only be used indoors, not outside,

in order to avoid interference with Mobile Satellite Services

(MSS).

This section outlines the safety precautions associated with

using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone”

are used in this section to refer to your phone.

Read this

information before using your mobile device

Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)

Signals

The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published

information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)

exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication

includes the following information:

Do cell phones pose a health hazard?

Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will

cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of

scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health

problems.

Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.

Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds

of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio

frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some

researchers have reported biological changes associated

with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.

The majority of studies published have failed to show an

association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell

phone and health problems.

The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the

microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at

substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by

mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects

(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not

produce heating effects causes no known adverse health

effects.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

209

The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not

be confused with the effects from other types of

electromagnetic energy.

Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found

in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.

Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away

from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can

permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the

genetic material.

The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,

including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great

enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.

Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.

Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,

infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic

radiation with relatively low frequencies.

While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can

increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two

areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly

vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little

blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.

Research Results to Date: Is there a connection

between RF and certain health problems?

The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In

addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies

that have shown a connection have failed.

The scientific community at large therefore believes that the

weight of scientific evidence does not show an association

between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones

and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community

has supported additional research to address gaps in

knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.

Interphone Study

Interphone is a large international study designed to

determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and

neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal

of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for

more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and

meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.

Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused

brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk

of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the

heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour

per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Health and Safety Information 210

slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors

determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions

being drawn from this data. Additional information about

Interphone can be found at

http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf.

Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did

not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional

research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA

continues to monitor developments in this field.

International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users

(COSMOS)

The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health

monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there

are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio

frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study

will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in

Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the

COSMOS study can be found at

http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html

Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio

Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence

(MOBI-KIDS)

MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the

relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy

from communication technologies including cell phones and

brain cancer in young people. This is an international

multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European

countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be

found at

http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/

view.php?ID=39.

Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)

Program of the National Cancer Institute

The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer

statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of

new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk

for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell

phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.

Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence

of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about

SEER can be found at

http://seer.cancer.gov/

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

211

Cell Phone Industry Actions

Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA

regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry

to take a number of steps, including the following:

•

Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF

for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;

•

Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to

the user; and

•

Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current

information on cell phone use and human health concerns.

The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting

bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on

Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to

assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect

the public.

Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other

Accessories

Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy

If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency

energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not

know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are

concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take

a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.

•

Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;

•

Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between

your head and the cell phone.

Hands-Free Kits

Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets

and various types of body-worn accessories such as

belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to

reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.

Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the

phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in

approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in

the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance

requirements when used against the head and against the

body.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Health and Safety Information 212

Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF

emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that

hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for

convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in

many states if you want to use your phone while driving.

Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head

from RF Radiation

Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF

emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that

accessories which claim to shield the head from those

emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield

the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while

others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory

attached to the phone.

Studies have shown that these products generally do not

work as advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called

“shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone.

The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,

leading to an increase in RF absorption.

Children and Cell Phones

The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users

of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and

teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure

apply to children and teenagers as well.

•

Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;

•

Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between

the head and the cell phone.

Some groups sponsored by other national governments have

advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones

at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United

Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.

In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no

evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors

or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone

use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based

on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.

Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from

various sources can be obtained from the following

organizations (updated 10/1/2010):

•

FCC RF Safety Program:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

213

•

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.

•

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/

(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)

•

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):

http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.

•

World Health Organization (WHO):

http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.

•

International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:

http://www.icnirp.de.

•

Health Protection Agency:

http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.

•

US Food and Drug Administration:

http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/

RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/

HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)

Certification Information

Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is

designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure

limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal

Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.

These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the

recommendations of two expert organizations: the National

Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)

and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed

by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,

government, and academia after extensive reviews of the

scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF

energy.

The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile

phones employs a unit of measurement known as the

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the

rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body

expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC

requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6

watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Health and Safety Information 214

The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety

to give additional protection to the public and to account for

any variations in measurements.

SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions

accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its

highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.

Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified

power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while

operating can be well below the maximum reported value.

This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple

power levels so as to use only the power required to reach

the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base

station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.

Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public,

it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not

exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each

model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at

the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For

body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets

FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory

that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a

minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.

Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with

FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an

Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all

reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC

RF exposure guidelines. This [mobile phone/tablet/device]

has a FCC ID number: A3LSGHI527 [Model Number: SGH-

i527] and the specific SAR levels for this [mobile phone/

tablet/device] can be found at the following FCC website:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/

The SAR information for this device can also be found on

Samsung’s website:

http://www.samsung.com/sar

SAR information on this and other model phones can be

accessed online on the FCC's website through

http://

transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html

. To find information that

pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone

FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the

case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to

remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have

the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the

instructions on the website and it should provide values for

typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional

SAR information can also be obtained at

http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sar-

cellular-telephones

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

215

FCC Part 15 Information to User

Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned

that changes or modifications not expressly approved by

Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply

with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and

can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and

used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does

cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the equipment off and

on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference

by one or more of the following measures:

•

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

•

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

•

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is connected.

•

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Commercial Mobile Alerting System

(CMAS)

This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts

from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System ("CMAS";

which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting

Network ("PLAN")). If your wireless provider has chosen to

participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the

provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's

coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be

available. For more information, please contact your wireless

provider.

Smart Practices While Driving

On the Road - Off the Phone

The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe

operation of his or her vehicle.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Health and Safety Information 216

Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task

should be performed while driving whether it be eating,

drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone

- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is

confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their

primary responsibility.

Do not engage in any activity while

driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your

eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that

your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes

impaired

. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible

driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand

and address distractions.

Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices

and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always

obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or

restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use

may be permitted in certain areas.

Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the

call go to voicemail when driving conditions require.

Remember, driving comes first, not the call!

If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these

tips:

•

Use a hands-free device;

•

Secure your phone within easy reach;

•

Place calls when you are not moving;

•

Plan calls when your car will be stationary;

•

Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;

•

Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are

driving and will suspend the call if necessary;

•

Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;

Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in

an automobile:

Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or

near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law

may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in

the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or

ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in

an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could

result in fines, penalties, or other damages.

Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the

driver's clear view of the street and traffic.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

217

Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web

browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.

Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video

games while operating a vehicle.

For more information, go to

http://www.ctia.org

Battery Use and Safety

Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or

damage

. Most battery issues arise from improper

handling of batteries and, particularly, from the

continued use of damaged batteries.

•

Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise

attempt to change the form of your battery

. Do not put a high

degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an

internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.

•

Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.

Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion.

Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate

normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety

hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked

by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear

to be working properly.

•

Do not place your battery in or near a heat source

. Excessive

heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the

phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery

with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair

dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in

high temperatures.

•

Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire

. The phone

or the battery may explode when overheated.

•

Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery

. Do not let leaking

battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For

safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized

service center.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Health and Safety Information 218

•

Avoid dropping the cell phone

. Dropping the phone or the

battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause

damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the

phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.

•

Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way

•

Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects

. Accidental

short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key,

jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +

and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for

example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag.

Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the

object causing the short-circuiting.

Important!

Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and

recharge your battery only with

Samsung-approved chargers which are

specifically designed for your phone.

WARNING!

Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may

present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard

Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone

caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or

chargers.

•

Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers

Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with

reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling

incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers.

Consumers should purchase manufacturer or

carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about

whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact

the manufacturer of the battery or charger.

•

Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and

charging devices could result in damage to the equipment

and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to

serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious

hazard

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

219

Samsung Mobile Products and

Recycling

Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its

customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine

Samsung accessories.

Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not

only important for safety, it benefits the environment.

Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.

Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and

accessories may not be available in your area.

We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung

mobile device by working with respected take-back

companies in every state in the country.

Drop It Off

You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device

and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous

Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these

locations may be found at:

http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/

usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp

Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted

at these locations for no fee.

Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or

batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations

where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional

information regarding specific locations may be found at:

http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/

index.htm

or at

http://www.call2recycle.org/

Mail It In

The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide

Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label.

Just go to

http://www.samsung.com/us/aboutsamsung/citizenship/

usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect.html?INT=ST

A_recyle_your_phone_page

and follow the instructions to

print out a free pre-paid postage label and then send your

old mobile device or battery to the address listed, via U.S.

Mail, for recycling.

Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved

recycler.

To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:

www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect

Or call, (877) 278-0799.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Health and Safety Information 220

Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile

devices and batteries

Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance

with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these

items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help

us protect the environment - recycle!

Warning!

Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may

explode.

UL Certified Travel Charger

The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL

safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety

instructions per UL guidelines:

FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY

LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE

PROPERTY DAMAGE.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE

INSTRUCTIONS.

DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR

ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE

INSTRUCTIONS.

FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH

AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR

OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE

POWER OUTLET.

THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE

CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR

HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.

Display / Touch-Screen

Please note the following information when using your

mobile device:

WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY

The display on your mobile device is made of glass or

acrylic and could break if your mobile device is

dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use

if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause

injury to you.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

221

WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A

TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE

If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,

please note that a touch-screen responds best to a

light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic

stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when

pressing on the touch-screen may damage the

tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For

more information, please refer to the “Standard

Limited Warranty”.

GPS

Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning

System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS

uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are

subject to changes implemented in accordance with the

Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio

navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance

of location-based technology on your mobile device.

Even with GPS, when you make an emergency call:

•

Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of

your ability; and

•

Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency

responder instructs you.

Navigation

Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data

relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or

incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over

time. In some areas, complete information may not be

available.

Therefore, you should always visually confirm that

the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see

before following them. All users should pay attention to road

conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may

impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs.

Emergency Calls

This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates

using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well

as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee

connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances.

Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless

mobile device for essential communications (medical

emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or

underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of

contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Health and Safety Information 222

make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be

switched on and in a service area with adequate signal

strength.

Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile

device networks or when certain network services and/or

mobile device features are in use. Check with local service

providers.

To make an emergency call:

1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.

2. From the Home screen, tap . The dialer is

displayed.

3. Key in the emergency number for your present location

(for example, 911 or other official emergency number).

Emergency numbers vary by location.

4. Tap the key.

If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you

may first need to deactivate those features before you can

make an emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your

local cellular service provider. When making an emergency

call, remember to give all the necessary information as

accurately as possible. Remember that your mobile device

may be the only means of communication at the scene of an

accident; do not cut off the call until given permission to do

so.

Care and Maintenance

Your mobile device is a product of superior design and

craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The

suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty

obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many

years:

Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:

Liquids of any kind

Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and

liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic

circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not

accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or

dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and

could cause a fire or explosion.

Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so

may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the

mobile device.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

223

Extreme heat or cold

Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /

113°F.

Microwaves

Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.

Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.

Dust and dirt

Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.

Cleaning solutions

Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong

detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft

cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water

solution.

Shock or vibration

Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough

handling can break internal circuit boards.

Paint

Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the

device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent

proper operation.

Responsible Listening

Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss

Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud

sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as

sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged

exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most

common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific

research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as

portable music players and cell phones, at high volume

settings for long durations may lead to permanent

noise-induced hearing loss.

This includes the use of headphones (including headsets,

earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices).

Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in

some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),

hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual

susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential

hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound

produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the

nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Health and Safety Information 224

that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting

that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of

sound, settings, and equipment.

You should follow some common sense recommendations

when using any portable audio device:

•

Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into

an audio source.

•

Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest

volume at which you can hear adequately.

•

Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,

not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your

hearing.

•

When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot

hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to

you can hear what you are listening to.

•

Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you

choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,

use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background

environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,

noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music

at lower volumes than when using earbuds.

•

Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less

time is required before you hearing could be affected.

•

Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,

such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.

Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound

normal.

•

Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you

experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or

experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your

portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.

You can obtain additional information on this subject from the

following sources:

American Academy of Audiology

11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300

Reston, VA 20190

Voice: (800) 222-2336

Email: info@audiology.org

Internet:

http://www.audiology.org/Pages/

default.aspx

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

225

Operating Environment

Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any

area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is

forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or

danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory

to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety

instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.

Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic

Devices

Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio

Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic

equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from

your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to

discuss alternatives.

National Institute on Deafness and Other

Communication Disorders

National Institutes of Health

31 Center Drive, MSC 2320

Bethesda, MD 20892-2320

Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov

Internet:

http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/

National Institute for Occupational Safety

and Health (NIOSH)

395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200

Patriots Plaza Building

Washington, DC 20201

Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH

(1-800-356-4674)

1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)

Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328

Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov

Internet:

http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/

default.html

1-888-232-6348 TTY

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Health and Safety Information 226

Implantable Medical Devices

A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained

between a handheld wireless mobile device and an

implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or

implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential

interference with the device.

Persons who have such devices:

•

Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches

from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is

turned ON;

•

Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;

•

Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to

minimize the potential for interference;

•

Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any

reason to suspect that interference is taking place;

•

Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of

your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about

using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical

device, consult your health care provider.

For more information see:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-

faqs.html#

Other Medical Devices

If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the

manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately

shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able

to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your

mobile device off in health care facilities when any

regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.

Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment

that could be sensitive to external RF energy.

Vehicles

RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately

shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with

the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle

before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You

should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that

has been added to your vehicle.

Posted Facilities

Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted

notices require you to do so.

Potentially Explosive Environments

Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a

potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and

instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

227

or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are

advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling

point (service station).

Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the

use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and

distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting

operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive

atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They

include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage

facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as

propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals

or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any

other area where you would normally be advised to turn off

your vehicle engine.

When your Device is Wet

Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is

already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if

the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,

leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it

to a service center.

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)

Regulations for Wireless Devices

The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has

established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices

to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive

hearing devices.

When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices

(hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile

devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining

noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others

to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the

amount of interference they generate.

The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating

system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device

users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their

hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated.

Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or

a label located on the box.

The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending

on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing

device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Health and Safety Information 228

be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out

the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to

evaluate it for your personal needs.

M-Ratings

: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet

FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference

to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled.

M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to

enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not

operate in telecoil mode.

T-Ratings

: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC

requirements and are likely to generate less interference to

hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4

is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to

enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in

telecoil mode.

Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid

manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you

find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device

is relatively immune to interference noise.

Under the current industry standard, American National

Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and

wireless mobile device rating values are added together to

indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a

hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless

mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two

values equals M5.

Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user

with normal use while using the hearing aid with the

particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would

indicate excellent performance.

However, these are not guarantees that all users will be

satisfied. T ratings work similarly.

M3 + M2 = 5

T3 + T2 = 5

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

229

The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in

the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19

standard.

HAC for Newer Technologies

This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing

aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.

However, there may be some newer wireless technologies

used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with

hearing aids.

It is important to try the different features of this phone

thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid

or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering

noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of

this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you

have questions about return or exchange policies, consult

your service provider or phone retailer.

Restricting Children's Access to Your

Mobile Device

Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play

with it because they could hurt themselves and others,

damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your

mobile device bill.

Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out

of the reach of small children.

FCC Notice and Cautions

FCC Notice

The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used

in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can

require you to stop using the mobile device if such

interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied

petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with

the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy

of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection

Association.

Cautions

Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not

expressly approved in this document could void your

warranty for this equipment and void your authority to

operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries,

antennas, and chargers. The use of any unauthorized

accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device

warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the

mobile device.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Health and Safety Information 230

Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex

piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping,

hitting, bending, or sitting on it.

Other Important Safety Information

•

Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or

install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service

may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to

the device.

•

Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in

your vehicle are securely mounted.

•

Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your

vehicle is mounted and operating properly.

•

When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can

build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical

shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the

headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or

touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static

electricity before inserting the headset.

•

Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive

materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its

parts, or accessories.

•

For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag

inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed

or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air

bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is

improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could

result.

•

Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use

of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be

dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate

authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on

an aircraft.

•

Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension

or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or

both.

•

While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do

not hold the screen too close to your eyes.

•

Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing

lights while watching videos or playing games for extended

periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device

immediately.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

231

•

Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively

perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a

touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may

experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,

or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended

periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,

and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort

during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.

•

If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or

light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Warranty Information 232

Section 12: Warranty Information

Standard Limited Warranty

What is covered and for how long?

SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC

(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and

accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material

and workmanship under normal use and service for the

period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first

consumer purchaser and continuing for the following

specified period of time after that date:

What is not covered?

This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the

Product.

This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage

resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal

conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,

dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,

electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents

and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;

of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;

(d) equipment that has the serial number or the

enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,

altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;

(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in

conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or

ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by

SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper

testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or

adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;

(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as

collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,

lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,

blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;

(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception

Phone 1 Year

Batteries 1 Year

Case/Pouch/Holster 90 Days

Other Phone Accessories 1 Year

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

233

or transmission, or viruses or other software problems

introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased

outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers

batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated

capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does

not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a

battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for

charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are

broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has

been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for

which it is specified.

What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?

During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product

is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited

Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at

SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at

SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new

parts or components when repairing any Product, or may

replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new

Product.

Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be

warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/

replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the

remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original

Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All

replaced Products, parts, components, boards and

equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to

any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or

assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.

What must you do to obtain warranty service?

To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must

return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in

an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the

sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the

original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product

and the seller’s name and address.

To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please

call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If

SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this

Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor

charges for the repair or return of such Product.

You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of

the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for

warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be

deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Warranty Information 234

What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?

THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF

SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE

REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS.

ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT

LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO

THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT

SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF

THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT

LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF

USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,

PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL,

SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR

DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE

PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT

ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY

LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS

AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO

THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE

OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR

EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR

THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR

EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH

THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH

THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.

RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,

OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY

SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS

SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER

OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR

EQUIPMENT.

Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be

construed to create an express warranty of any kind with

respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,

representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend

this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or

claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,

on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited

Warranty.

This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you

may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

235

What is the procedure for resolving disputes?

ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM

THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR

PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED

EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,

AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.

Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with

a dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or

claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,

shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class

action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single

arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,

the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall

be conducted according to the American Arbitration

Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to

consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered

pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State

of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,

shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all

disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The

arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and

application of this arbitration provision and the Limited

Warranty.

For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,

exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are

$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you

prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness

fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant

SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs

unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad

faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no

more than half of the total administrative, facility and

arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and

SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.

Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in

which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees

and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)

shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim

case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or

apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,

expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on

the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.

This arbitration provision also applies to claims against

SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any

such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or

performance.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Warranty Information 236

You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by

providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days

from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the

Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to

optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: “Arbitration

Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name

and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;

or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI

or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;

(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found

under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product

beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the

outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).

Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no

later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer

purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same

information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be

effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting

out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the

coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will

continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.

Severability

If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or

unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall

not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited

Warranty.

Precautions for Transfer and Disposal

If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using

the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed

on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to

retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.

To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of

this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to

Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File

System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and

return all settings to default settings. Please contact the

Samsung Customer Care Center

for details.

Important!

Please provide warranty information (proof of

purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in

order to provide this service at no charge. If the

warranty has expired on the device, charges may

apply.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

237

Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC

1301 E. Lookout Drive

Richardson, Texas 75082

Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG

Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)

rights reserved.

No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior

written approval. Specifications and availability subject to

change without notice. [111611]

End User License Agreement for

Software

IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License

Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you

(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung

Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") for software, owned by

Samsung and its affiliated companies and its third party

suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which

includes computer software and may include associated

media, printed materials, "online" or electronic

documentation in connection with your use of this device

("Software").

This device requires the use of preloaded software in its

normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED

SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU

DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR

THE SOFTWARE.

GRANT OF LICENSE

. Samsung grants you the following

rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions

of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run

one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other

permanent storage media of one computer and use the

Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,

and you may not make the Software available over a network

where it could be used by multiple computers at the same

time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine

readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the

backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary

notices contained on the original.

Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source

licenses. The open source license provisions may override

some of the terms of this EULA. We make the applicable

open source licenses available to you on the Legal Notices

section of the Settings menu of your device.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Warranty Information 238

RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP

. Samsung

reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.

The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual

property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the

title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the

Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.

LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS

. You may not reverse

engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to

discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software

(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly

permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),

or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create

derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,

lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting

services with the Software.

CONSENT TO USE OF DATA

. You agree that Samsung and its

affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered

as part of the product support services related to the

Software provided to you, if any, such as IMEI (your device’s

unique identification number), device number, model name,

customer code, access recording, your device’s current SW

version, MCC (Mobile Country Code), MNC (Mobile Network

Code). Samsung and its affiliates may use this information

solely to improve their products or to provide customized

services or technologies to you and will not disclose this

information in a form that personally identifies you. At all

times your information will be treated in accordance with

Samsung’s Privacy Policy, which can be viewed at:

http://account.samsung.com/membership/pp

SOFTWARE UPDATES

. Samsung may provide to you or

make available to you updates, upgrades, supplements and

add-on components (if any) of the Software, including bug

fixes, service upgrades (parts or whole), products or devices,

and updates and enhancements to any software previously

installed (including entirely new versions), (collectively

“Update”) after the date you obtain your initial copy of the

Software to improve the Software and ultimately enhance

your user experience with your device. This EULA applies to

all and any component of the Update that Samsung may

provide to you or make available to you after the date you

obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide

other terms along with such Update. To use Software

provided through Update, you must first be licensed for the

Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the Update.

After the Update, you may no longer use the Software that

formed the basis for your Update eligibility. The updated

Software version may add new functions and, in some

limited cases, may delete existing functions.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

239

While the Update will be generally available, in some limited

circumstances, the Software updates will only be offered by

your network carrier, and such Software updates will be

governed by your contractual relationship with your network

carrier.

With the “Automatic Update” function enabled (as in the

default setting in the System Update menu in the Setting),

your device downloads some Updates automatically from

time to time. Your device will, however, ask for your consent

before installing any Update If you choose to disable the

“Automatic Update” function, then you can check the

availability of new Updates by clicking on the “Check

Update” menu in the Setting. We recommend that you check

availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of

your device. If you want to avoid any use of network data for

the Update downloads, then you should choose the “Wi-Fi

Only” option in the Setting. (Regardless of the option you

choose, the “Automatic Update” function downloads Updates

only through Wi-Fi connection.)

6. Some features of the Software may require your device to

have access to the internet and may be subject to

restrictions imposed by your network or internet provider.

Unless your device is connected to the internet through Wi-Fi

connection, the Software will access through your mobile

network, which may result in additional charges depending

on your payment plan. In addition, your enjoyment of some

features of the Software may be affected by the suitability

and performance of your device hardware or data access.

SOFTWARE TRANSFER

. You may not transfer this EULA or

the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party

unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device

which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer

must include all of the Software (including all component

parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this

EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.

The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a

consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the

Software must agree to all the EULA terms.

EXPORT RESTRICTIONS

. You acknowledge that the

Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.

You agree to comply with all applicable international and

national laws that apply to the Software, including all the

applicable export restriction laws and regulations.

TERMINATION

. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your

rights under this License will terminate automatically without

notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Warranty Information 240

terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this

EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all

copies, full or partial, of the Software.

10.

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY

. UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED

IN A WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY

ACCOMPANYING YOUR DEVICE, ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED

BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE (WHETHER

INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE, DOWNLOADED, OR

OTHERWISE OBTAINED) IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN

"AS AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND

FROM SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE

FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE

LAW, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS,

IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY

QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,

ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON

INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER

VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT

ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS

MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION,

WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM

SAMSUNG OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER

THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING

THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY

SORT FROM SAMSUNG.

11.

THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS

. Certain third party

applications may be included with, or downloaded to this

mobile device. Samsung makes no representations

whatsoever about any of these applications. Since Samsung

has no control over such applications, you acknowledge and

agree that Samsung is not responsible for the availability of

such applications and is not responsible or liable for any

content, advertising, products, services, or other materials

on or available from such applications. You expressly

acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is

at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory

quality, performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up

to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select

to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses,

and other items of a destructive nature. References on this

mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of

any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you,

and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship,

or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its

products and services. You agree that Samsung shall not be

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

241

responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or

loss, including but not limited to any damage to the mobile

device or loss of data, caused or alleged to be caused by, or

in connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party

content, products, or services available on or through any

such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of

any third-party application is governed by such third party

application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement,

information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly

or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will

be subject to such third party application provider's privacy

policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY

RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR

ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION

PROVIDER. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY

WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL

INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY

APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH

PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD

PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.

12.

SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS

. Certain Samsung applications

and services may be included with, or downloaded to, this

mobile device. Many of them require Samsung Services

membership registration (“Samsung Account”), and your

rights and obligations will be set forth in separate Samsung

Account terms and conditions and privacy policies. There are

non-Samsung Account applications and services that require

your consent to their separate terms and conditions and

privacy policies. You expressly acknowledge and agree that

your use of such applications and services will be subject to

the applicable terms and conditions and privacy policies.

13.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR

RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE

SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS

CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED

TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS,

OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN

OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE

TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES,

AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF

SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR

LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Warranty Information 242

THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL

LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF

ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON

CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR

USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON

THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS

EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID

SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH

THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS

MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS,

EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 10,

11, 12 AND 13) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT

PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY

FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

14.

U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS

. The

Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as

"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"

and "commercial software documentation" with only those

rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the

terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only

with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted

to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions

herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to

Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.

15.

APPLICABLE LAW

. This EULA is governed by the laws of

the jurisdiction where you are a resident or, if a resident of

the United States, by the laws of the state of Texas, without

regard to its conflict of law provisions. This EULA shall not be

governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the

International Sale of Goods, the application of which is

expressly excluded.

16.

DISPUTE RESOLUTION

(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or

difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of

the Software is not amicably settled, it shall be subject to the

non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction

where you are a resident. Notwithstanding the foregoing,

Samsung may apply for injunctive remedies (or an equivalent

type of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.

(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG

ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE

SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH

FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR

JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or

consolidated with any other person’s or entity’s claim or

dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,

shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

243

action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single

arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,

the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall

be conducted according to the American Arbitration

Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to

consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered

pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State

of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,

shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes

that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator

shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this

arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in

which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees

and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small

Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your

reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as

part of any award, but may not grant Samsung its attorney

fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that

the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case,

you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total

administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such

fees, whichever is less, and Samsung shall pay the

remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator

fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims,

exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed

$5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be determined according to

AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to

the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties,

reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs.

Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any

court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision also

applies to claims against Samsung’s employees,

representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from

the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this

dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung

no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first

consumer purchaser’s purchase of this device. To opt out,

you must send notice by e-mail to

optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: "Arbitration

Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your

name and address; (b) the date on which the device was

purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and

(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you

have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on

the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which

can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of

the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;

and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Warranty Information 244

removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling

1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the

date of the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the

device and providing the same information. These are the

only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of

this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute

resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or

its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the

benefits of this license.

17.

ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY

. This EULA is the

entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the

Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral

or written communications, proposals and representations

with respect to the Software or any other subject matter

covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to

be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions

shall continue in full force and effect. [050113]

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

245

Section 13: Samsung Product Registration

www.samsung.com/register

Get More

• Latest info on promotions, events and special oers on related products

• Review Samsung products and share your opinion

• Great deals on downloads

Customize your Samsung device experience

• Activate product warranty

• Access to a personalized My Samsung Mobile account

• No monthly fees

Scan this code to go

directly to the registration page.

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

246

Index

Abc mode 63

About Device 160

Accounts 151

Add accounts 151

Adding a New Contact

Idle Screen 69

Address Book 68

Adding a New Contact 69

Adding Pauses to Contact

Numbers 70

Copying a contact to the Phone 79

Copying Contacts to Phone 79

Copying Contacts to SIM Card 79

Deleting Address Book Entries 80

Deleting Contacts from SIM card

Dialing a Number 71

Favorites 78

Finding an Address Book Entry 71

Group Settings 77

Managing Address Book Contacts

Service Dialing Numbers 80

Using Contacts List 71

Address Book Options 75

Adobe PDF 195

Air Gesture

Activate 33

Quick Glance 33

Air gesture 147

Air view 150

Airplane mode 121, 131

Alarm 182

Android Beam 126

Applications

Using the Camcorder 102

Using the Camera 95

World Clock 183

Applications settings

managing 158

running services 158

AT&T DriveMode 178

AT&T FamilyMap 178

AT&T Locker 179

AT&T Navigator 179

AT&T Smart Wi-Fi 173

Back key 31

Backing up your data 152

Battery

charging 9

Display Percentage 11

Installing 7

Low Battery Indicator 11

Battery Use & Safety 217

Bigger Font

Setting 140

Blocking Mode 138

On 138

Bluetooth

Outgoing Headset Condition 135

Sending contacts 176

Books

Play Books 193

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

247

Bubble

Options 107

Calculator 180

Calendar 180

Calibration 149

Call Functions 50

3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)

Address Book 52

Adjusting the Call Volume 57

Answering a Call 53

Call Back Missed Call 54

Call Duration 56

Call forwarding 61

Call Log 54

Call waiting 61

Correcting the Number 51

Dialing a Recent Number 51

Ending a Call 51

International Call 50

Making a Call 50

Manual Pause Dialing 50

Options During a Call 57

Putting a Call on Hold 58

Saving a recent call number to

Address Book 55

Searching for a Number in

Address Book 61

Using the Speakerphone 60

Call rejection 133

Call Sound

Adding More Volume 57

Personalize 58

Camcorder 102

Settings 98

Shooting Video 102

Camcorder Options

Camcorder Options after a Video is

Taken 102

Camera 95

Modes 97

Quick Settings 98

Settings 98

Taking Pictures 95

Care and Maintenance 222

Changing Your Settings 118

Charging battery 9

ChatON 117

Children and Cell Phones 212

Clock 182

Commercial Mobile Alerting System

(CMAS) 111, 215

Contacts 68

Emptying 167

Creating a Playlist 89

Dialing Options 54

Display

icons 20

Using Negative Colors 141

Display / Touch-Screen 220

Do cell phones pose a health hazard?

208

Downloads 185

Draft Messages 104

DriveMode 178

Dual Camera 96

Dual View 96

Editing a Picture 100

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

248

Email 111

Creating a Corporate Email

Account 112

Creating Additional Email

Accounts 112

Switching Between Email

Accounts 113

Emergency alert settings 110

Emergency Alerts (CMAS) 111

Emergency Calls 221

Making 51

With SIM 52

Without SIM 51

Entering Text 62

Changing the Text Entry Mode 63

Using 123Sym Mode 64

Using Abc Mode 63

Using Swype 65, 66

Using Symbol/Numeric Mode 64

Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)

Signals 208

Extra Volume 57

Facebook

Swpe Connect 145

Family Map 178

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)

Regulations for Wireless Devices 227

FCC Notice and Cautions 229

Featured Apps 186

Flipboard 186

Font Size

Changing 140

Gallery 92

viewing pictures 93

viewing videos 93

Gestures 147

Overview 32

Getting Started 6

Setting Up Your Phone 6

Voice mail 15

Gmail 113

Personalize Swype 146

Google Chrome 182

Google Maps 189

Google Play Music 90

Google Voice Typing 65

Google voice typing settings 142

GPS 221

Group

Adding a contact 77

Editing 78

Removing a contact 77

Group Settings

Editing a Caller Group 78

Handwriting feature 65

Health and Safety Information 208

Home key 31

Home screen mode 133

Hotspots 121, 122, 123, 124

Icons

Application 24

Indicator 20

Icons, description 20

In-Call Options 57

Incognito 165

Create Window 165

Exit Window 165

International Call 50

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

249

Internet 163

Joining Contacts 72

Keyboard Input Methods 142

Keyboard settings 143

Keypad

Changing Text Input 63

Kies via Wi-Fi 123

Landscape 62

Language and input 142

Language and keyboard settings

select locale 142

Local 188

Location services 153

Location services settings 127

Lock Screen

Say Wake-Up Command 128

Shortcuts 128

Maps 189

Memory Card 48

Memory Card Installation 8

key 31

Menu Navigation 31

Message

Thread Options 107

Message Options 104

Message Search 108

Messaging

Adding a Signature 110

Block Unknown Senders 110

Creating and Sending Text

Messages 103

Deleting a message 108

Draft 104

Gmail 113

Handwriting 65

Locked 104

Options 104

Scheduled Messages 104

Settings 108

Signing into Email 111

Signing into Gmail 113

Spam 105

Translate Text 105

Types of Messages 103

microSD card 8, 48

Installing 8

Removing 8

microSDHC card 8, 48

Mobile Hotspot 123

Mobile TV 90

Mobile Web 163

Entering Text in the Mobile Web

Browser 164

Navigating with the Mobile Web

163

Using Bookmarks 165

Mono

Audio Setup 141

Motion 148

Activate 33

Overview 32

Motions 147

Movies 92

Multi Window

Activate/Deactivate 37

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

250

Customizing 38

Increase App Window Size 40

Maximize App 40

Panel Relocation 38

Rearrange Apps 38

Removing Apps 38

Restoring Apps 39

Running Multiple Apps 39

Switch Arrangement 40

Tab Repositioning 37

Using 36

Multimedia 81

Music 87

Music Options 88

Music Player 87

adding music 89

creating a playlist 89

playlists 89

removing music 89

settings 88

Mute 57, 60

My Files 190

myAT&T 191

Navigation 192

command keys 31

context-sensitive menus 32

terms used 31

touch gestures 31

Navigator 179

Nearby devices 126

Negative Colors 141

NFC

On 93

Noise Reduction 58

Operating Environment 225

Optical Reader 193

Other Important Safety Information

230

Palm Motion

Activate 33

On 33

PC Connections 177

Personal Localized Alerting Network

(PLAN) 111, 215

Phone

Front View 17

icons 20

Rear View 19

Side View 18

Switching On/Off 11

Photo

Editing 100

Picture

Color Correction 101

Face Corrections 101

Frame 101

Pictures 92

Gallery 92

Sharing 93

Places 193

Play Books 193

Play Movies & TV 92

Play Music 90

Play Store 194

Pointer speed 147

POLARIS Office 5 195

POLARIS® Office 5 195

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

251

Polaris® Office 5 29

Power Saving Mode 139

Powering

Off 11

On 11

Privacy settings

factory data reset 152

QWERTY keypad 62

Red Eye

Correction 101

Reducing Exposure

Hands-Free Kits and Other

Accessories 211

Reject list 56

remote control WatchON 201

Reset

factory data 152

Responsible Listening 223

Restricting Children's Access to Your

Mobile device 229

S Beam 126

On 93

Sharing Multiple Pictures 94

Sharing Pictures 93

S Memo 195

Creating a New Memo 195

S Translator 197

S Voice 198

Set Wake-Up Command 128

SafeSearch

Filtering 206

Samsung Hub

Creating a New Account 81

Using 82

Samsung Link 84

Sharing Media 86

Samsung Link Settings 85

Samsung Mobile Products and Recy-

cling 219

scientific calculator 180

SD Card 48

Security 152, 153

Security settings

device administration 155

trusted credentials 156

Service Dialing Numbers 80

Settings 98, 118

Shortcuts 20

SIM card

installation 7

Installing 6

Smart Practices While Driving 215

Smart screen 149

Smart Switch 16

Smart Wi-Fi 173

Snooze 183

Software Update 161

Spam

Add Number 105, 107

Block Unknown Senders 110

Settings 110

Spam Messages

Assigning 105

Speakerphone Key 60

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certi-

fication Information 213

Standard Limited Warranty 232

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

252

Stopwatch 184

Swap 58

SWYPE

entering text using 65, 66

Swype

Cellular Data 145

Connect 145

Contribute Data Usage 145

Preferences 144

Updates 146

Swype Keypad Settings 144

Swype Settings 67

Symbol/Numeric mode 64

Synchronization settings

auto-sync 127

Synchronizing Accounts 151

Tethering 123

Text Input

Abc mode 63

Methods 62

numeric mode 64

symbol mode 64

Timer 184

Automatic Answering 135

Touch Screen 12

Lock/Unlock 12

Transferring Large Files 93

Translate 105

TranslateMessage Bubble 108

Translator 197

Travel Charger 9

Using 10

TTY Mode 138

Twitter

Personalize Swype 145

UL Certified Travel Charger 220

Understanding Your Phone 16

Features of Your Phone 16

Front View 17

Rear View 19

Side Views 18

Unmute 57

USB settings

mass storage device 177

USB Tethering 123

Using Favorites

Adding Favorites 166

Deleting a Favorite 166

Editing Favorites 166

Video 91

Video player 91

Voice control 150

Voice Mail

Accessing 15

From Another Phone 15

Setup 15

Voice Recorder 200

Volume 131

Warranty Information 232

WatchON 201

Adding a New Room 204

Changing Channels 203

Configure Just For You 204

Initial Configuration 202

Locating Programs 203

Personalize 204

Settings 204

Using 203

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

253

Web 163

Widgets

Calculator 25

Camera 25

Email 25

Gmail 26, 186

Settings 29, 199

Voice Recorder 200

Wi-Fi 169

using Kies via Wi-Fi 127

Wi-Fi Direct 119, 172

Wi-Fi Settings 119

World Clock

Deleting an Entry 184

World clock 183

YouTube 205

High Quality 205

SafeSearch Filtering 206

Settings 205

YPmobile (Yellowpages mobile) 207

DRAFT

For Internal Use Only

Samsung Electronics Co SGHI527 Portable Handset with Multi-band WCDMA/GSM/EDGE/LTE, WLAN, Bluetooth and RFID User Manual i527 Mega

Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Portable Handset with Multi-band WCDMA/GSM/EDGE/LTE, WLAN, Bluetooth and RFID i527 Mega

Users Manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation